E
Keep This Manual For Future Reference.
SAMPLING REVERBERATOR
Owner’s Manual
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on
different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in
is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service
Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E
or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
Laser Diode Properties
* Material : GaAlAs
* Wavelength : 765–815nm
* Emission Duration : Continuous
* Laser Output Power : Less than 0.22mW
Laser output is measured at a
distance of 20cm from the object
lens on the optical pick-up head.
(Note)
This unit is classified as a
Class 1 laser product.
This label is located on the
rear panel.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT
Klassmärkning för Finland.
CAUTION
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT
IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
ATTENTION
TOUTE MANIPULATION DES COMMANDES,
TOUT RÉGLAGE OU TOUTE UTILISATION
AUTRES QUE CEUX SPÉCIFIÉS DANS CE
MANUEL POURRAIENT ENTRAÎNER UNE
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AUX RADIATIONS
.
VORSICHT
DIE VERWENDUNG DER BEDIENELEMENTE
UND EINSTELLFUNKTIONEN BZW. DAS
AUSFÜHREN VON HANDLUNGEN IN EINER
NICHT AUSDRÜCKLICH IN DIESER
ANLEITUNG ERWAHNTEN WEISE KÖNNEN ZU
EINER GESUNDHEITSSCHADLICHEN
BESTRAHLUNG FÜHREN
.
PRECAUCIÓN
EL USO DE CONTROLES, AJUSTES O LA
APLICACIÓN DE PROCEDIMIENTOS
DISTINTOS A LOS DESCRITOS EN ESTE
MANUAL, PUEDE OCASIONAR UNA
EXPOSICIÓN A RADIACIÓN PELIGROSA
.
Important Information
i
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Important Information
Read the following before using the SREV1
Warnings
• Do not subject the unit to extreme temperatures, humidity, direct sunlight, or dust,
which could be a potential fire or electrical shock hazard.
• Do not allow water to enter the unit or allow it to get wet. Fire or electrical shock may
result.
• Connect the power cord or AC adapter only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this
Owner’s Manual
or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
• Hold the power-cord plug or AC adapter when disconnecting from an AC outlet. Never
pull the cord. A power cord damaged through pulling is a potential fire and electrical
shock hazard.
• Do not touch the power plug or AC adapter with wet hands. Doing so is a potential elec-
trical shock hazard.
• Do not place heavy objects, including the unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged
power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place
heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet.
• Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid
or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a
fire and electrical shock hazard.
• If the power cord is damaged (e.g., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
• Do not plug several pieces of equipment into the same AC outlet. This may overload
the AC outlet, and could be a fire or electrical shock hazard. It may also affect the per-
formance of some equipment.
• If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or
liquid gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord or AC
adapter from the AC outlet and consult your dealer for repair. Using a unit in this con-
dition is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not place small objects on top of the unit. Metal objects falling inside is a fire and
electrical shock hazard.
• If a foreign object or water gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the
power cord or AC adapter from the AC outlet and consult your dealer for repair. Using
a unit in this condition is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard.
• If the unit is dropped or the cabinet damaged, turn off the power, remove the power
plug or AC adapter from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using
the unit without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result.
• Do not remove the unit covers. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think inter-
nal inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer.
• Do not attempt to modify the unit. This is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard.
ii
Important Information
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
• Do not block the front panel air inlet, ventilation slots, or fan outlets. Doing so is a
potential fire hazard.
Cautions
• Allow enough free space around the SREV1 for normal ventilation. This should be 20
cm behind, 10 cm at the sides, and 30 cm above. These distances should also be adopted
when rack-mounting the SREV1. If the SREV1 is mounted in a portable rack case, keep
the rear of the case open when using the SREV1 so as not to obstruct the flow of air from
the two cooling fans. If the airflow is not adequate, the SREV1 will heat up inside and
may cause a fire. Do not mount the SREV1 above equipment that produces a lot of heat,
such as a power amplifier.
• Turn off all audio equipment when connecting to the unit, and use only cables of the
type specified in this
Owner’s Manual.
• If you plan not to use the unit for a long period of time, remove the power cord or AC
adapter from the AC outlet. Leaving the unit connected is a potential fire hazard.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the unit.
Use only a soft, dry cloth.
• If the unit is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a warmer
environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form inside the
unit, which may affect performance. In this case, the unit should be allowed to acclima-
tize for about one hour before use.
• When the wordclock is changed on the wordclock master device, noise may occur from
the SREV1’s outputs, especially if an MY8-AT I/O card is installed, so turn down your
power amps beforehand, otherwise any connected speakers may be damaged.
• If the RC-SREV1 displays the message “LOW BATTERY” when you turn on the unit,
ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the internal battery as soon as possible. The unit will
still work, but data other than backed up data will be lost. We recommend that you save
this data to a PC Card before replacing the battery.
• For electrical safety reasons, it’s important that the SREV1 is grounded properly. The
supplied power cord has a three-pin plug, and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet
is grounded, then the SREV1 will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If
the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, however, a ground connection should
be made to the dedicated grounding screw.
Important Information
iii
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Handling CD-ROMs
• Use only discs of the type specified in this
Owner’s Manual
.
• The CD-ROM drive is for use with data discs only. Never insert audio CDs.
• Store discs in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt.
• Always store discs in their cases.
• When handling discs, be careful not to touch the surface. Hold discs by the edge. Fin-
gerprints, smudges, scratches, or dirt can affect performance.
• Be careful not to scratch the labeled side of the disc. Even scratches on that side can
affect performance.
• Fingerprints and dust should be removed by wiping gently from the center of the disc
towards the disc edge, using a soft, dry cloth. Never wipe in a circular motion and never
rub a disc hard with a dry cloth.
• For stubborn stains and dirt, use a cleaning kit designed specifically for use with CDs.
Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth.
• For disc marking, use only pens specifically designed for writing on CDs and write only
on the designated area. Do not attach a label to a disc.
• If a disc is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a warmer
environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form on the disc
surface, which may affect performance. In this case, the disc should be allowed to accli-
matize for about one hour before use.
• Do not under any circumstances attempt to use discs that are cracked or warped. Doing
so may seriously damage the unit.
Handling PC Cards
• Use only PC Cards of the type specified in this
Owner’s Manual
.
• Some PC Cards and PC Card adapters cannot be used with the SREV1.
• Do not eject a PC Card while the activity indicator is lit. Doing so may cause data lose.
• Store PC Cards in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt.
• Always store PC Cards in their cases.
Precautions for Transportation
During transportation, keep the CD-ROM door shut with tape, or a pad, or the like.
• When using tape, use tape that adheres well to the front panel.
• When using a pad, use a pad stiff enough that the elasticity holds the tray in place.
Tape
Pad
CD-ROM door
Front panel
iv
Important Information
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Interference
The SREV1 uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio
and television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the
affected equipment.
SREV1 Exclusion of Certain Responsibility
Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages includ-
ing personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the
SREV1.
Package Contents
The SREV1 package contains the following items:
• SREV1 Sampling Reverberator
• CD-ROM containing preset reverb programs and SREV1 utilities
•Power cord
• This
Owner’s Manual
Contact your Yamaha dealer if something is missing.
Optional Extras
• RC-SREV1 Remote Controller
• DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board
Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are
registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Intel and Pentium are registered trade-
marks and MMX is a trademark of Intel Corporation. PCMCIA is a registered trade-
mark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Tascam
Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac
Corporation. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Yamaha is a trade-
mark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Copyright
No part of the SREV1, its software, including the supplied impulse-response data, or
this
Owner’s Manual
may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means
without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation. Using the supplied
impulse-response data with equipment other than the SREV1, or obtaining the data by
sampling or any other means, is strictly prohibited.
© 2000 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.
Yamaha Web Site
Information about the SREV1, related products, and other Yamaha professional audio
equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at:
<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>.
Important Information
v
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
About this Manual
This
Owner’s Manual
covers both the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator and the optional
RC-SREV1 Remote Controller. (The SREV1 software manuals are on the CD-ROM.)
All the information you need in order to operate the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator
and the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller is contained in this manual. Use the
table of contents to familiarize yourself with its organization and locate topics, and use
the index to locate specific information. A glossary of SREV1-related jargon is provided
on page 93.
Installing the SREV1
When mounting the SREV1 in a rack, remove its feet and leave adequate ventilation
space all around (at least 20 cm of free space behind). If the SREV1 is mounted in a por-
table rack case, keep the rear of the case open when using the SREV1 so as not to
obstruct the flow of air from the two cooling fans. Do not mount the SREV1 above
equipment that produces a lot of heat, such as a power amplifier.
Conventions Used in this Manual
In this manual, the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator, the optional RC-SREV1 Remote
Controller, and the SREV1 software are referred to as the “SREV1,” “RC-SREV1,” and
“SREV1 software” respectively.
The RC-SREV1 features two types of button: physical buttons that you can press (e.g.,
ENTER and UTILITY) and buttons that appear on the RC-SREV1 display pages. Ref-
erences to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets, such as “press the [ENTER]
button.” References to page buttons are not emphasized, for example, select the WCLK
IN button.
Generally there are three versions of each RC-SREV1 display page, one for each mode:
2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. If relevant to the task being explained, all three
pages are shown. If the item being discussed is the same regardless of which mode is
selected, then only one page is shown.
“PC” refers to an IBM PC-compatible computer running a Windows operating system.
vi
Important Information
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS
● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen
back-up.
● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde
van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service
Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory
back-up.
● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the
disposal at the end of the service life please consult your
retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL
UTRECHT
Tel: 030-2828425
● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.
Contents
vii
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Contents
1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Welcome to the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The SREV1 in a Nutshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SREV1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SREV1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SREV1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2 Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SREV1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
RC-SREV1 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
RC-SREV1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
RC-SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Turning On & Off the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RC-SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About the Internal Operations at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting Reverb Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assigning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting Input & Output Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting the Meter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bypassing the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using the Title Edit dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Working with Quick Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Working with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5 Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Main 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Main 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fine Reverb Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Pre EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Post EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Loading Impulse-Response Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
viii
Contents
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
6 Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
About Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Multiple-unit Operating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
MIDI & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MIDI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the MIDI Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8 Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Wordclocks & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Wordclock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting the Wordclock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Wordclock Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9 I/O Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
I/O Options & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Available I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Choosing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
General Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Digital Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Digital Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Control I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Remote Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MIDI Implementation Chart
Welcome
1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Welcome
1
In this chapter...
Welcome to the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The SREV1 in a Nutshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SREV1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SREV1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SREV1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2
Chapter 1—Welcome
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Welcome to the SREV1
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha SREV1 Sampling Reverberator.
Unlike conventional digital reverberators, which synthesize reverberation using con-
trived signal-processing algorithms, the new SREV1 Sampling Reverberator from
Yamaha employs digital convolution processing to impose an acoustic “fingerprint” of
a previously measured environment onto any audio signal, faithfully recreating the
original reverberation, with accurate reflection detail identical to that produced had the
sound been heard in that environment. The SREV1 is perfect for recording studios,
audio post, broadcast, concert halls, theaters, or anyone looking for superb quality
reverb that sounds just like the real thing, with the option to sample the reverberation
characteristics of any location for use back in the studio.
The SREV1 in a Nutshell
Sonic “fingerprints” are produced by measuring the impulse response (i.e., acoustic
characteristics) of an environment, which involves “blasting out” time-stretched pulses
through an accurate speaker system and recording the results via carefully placed
microphones. The resultant impulse-response data can then be used by the SREV1 to
convolve the captured acoustic characteristics onto any audio signal.
In addition to stereo reverb (2-channel mode), the SREV1 offers four-channel process-
ing for surround reverb (4-channel mode). Alternatively, the SREV1 can be configured
as two fully independent reverberators (2-channel x2 mode), each with its own inputs,
outputs, and program settings.
Thirty-two of Yamaha’s new convolution chips provide the necessary “horsepower” for
real-time convolution of up to 5.46 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 2.73 sec-
onds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode). Featuring an additional 32 con-
volution chips, the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board doubles the available
convolution time to a maximum of 10.92 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 5.46
seconds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode).
Measured impulse response data is combined with variable parameters such as reverb
time and initial delay to form reverb
programs
, which can be stored in special
Quick
POWER
ON OFF
TEMP
PROTECTION
POWER
–dB
LEVEL
CLIP
L
L
R
0
3
6
10
15
20
25
30 30
40
R
0
3
6
10
15
20
25
40
–dB
LEVEL
CLIP
L
L
R
0
3
6
10
15
20
25
30 30
40
R
0
3
6
10
15
20
25
40
PC ATA CARD
FLASH CARD
FL FR
RL RR
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
Sampling on location Convolution processing
Impulse-response data
Firing time-stretched pulses
The SREV1 in a Nutshell
3
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
memories
or the Internal Card or PC Card. Up to six programs can be stored in Quick
memory in 2-channel or 4-channel mode; 12 in 2-channel x2 mode. Programs in
Quick memory can be recalled instantly via the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller
or MIDI Program Changes.
Projects, which contain all the Quick memory programs and the current program set-
tings, provide a convenient way to manage programs and settings for each job. Projects
can be stored on the Internal Card or PC Card.
The PC Card slot is fully compatible with the PC Card ATA specification and supports
the FAT16 file system. The CD-ROM drive supports the ISO9660 Level 2 format. Both
the PC Card and CD-ROM format is compatible with Windows.
The supplied CD-ROM contains preset reverb programs of famous venues from
around the world, and a CD-ROM library is planned for future release. The preset pro-
grams on the supplied CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory.
Program editing is handled at two levels: Main parameters and Fine parameters. With
Main parameter editing, channel parameters, such as reverb time, initial delay, reverb
balance, EQ, etc., are grouped, so that, for example, the reverb time of all channels can
be set simultaneously. Fine parameter editing adds pre-convolution 4-band PEQ,
post-convolution 4-band PEQ, and impulse-response data loading. Reverb parameters
can be edited individually or grouped. Reverb balance and reverb level parameters for
each channel can be controlled individually via MIDI Control Changes.
Two AES/EBU inputs and outputs (providing 4 channels) are built in and two mini
YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots offer various analog and digital
I/O options (AES/EBU, ADAT, Tascam). Inputs can be assigned to channels individu-
ally, allowing various input/output configurations. In 2-channel mode, for example, a
single input can be assigned to both channels (left and right) for mono in/stereo out
operation, or an individual input can be assigned to each channel for true stereo in/ste-
reo out operation.
Superb sonic performance is provided by Yamaha’s new convolution chip, 24-bit I/O,
32-bit internal signal processing, and 48 kHz internal wordclock. External wordclocks
of 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz are supported and can be sourced via the dedicated BNC word-
clock input, AES/EBU inputs, or card slot inputs.
Up to four SREV1s can be controlled using the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller,
which features a large 320 x 240 dot graphical display, with fluorescent backlight and
adjustable brightness and contrast, four motorized faders for parameter editing, and
input and output clip indicators. Power is supplied by the SREV1.
4
Chapter 1—Welcome
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Features
Sonic Performance
• 32 Yamaha convolution chips
• 24-bit I/O and 32-bit internal processing
• 48 kHz internal wordclock
• 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz external wordclock
Reverb Modes & Convolution Times
• 2-channel (stereo), 4-channel (surround), and 2-channel x2 (A and B) reverb modes
• Maximum convolution time of 5.46 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 2.73 sec-
onds per channel (4-channel mode or 2-channel x2 mode)
• Featuring an additional 32 convolution chips, the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion
Board doubles the available convolution time to a maximum of 10.92 seconds per
channel (2-channel mode), 5.46 seconds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2
mode)
Programs & Projects
• Programs combine impulse-response data with variable parameters such as reverb
time, initial delay, EQ, and more
• Quick memories hold six instantly recallable programs (2-channel or 4-channel
mode); 12 programs (2-channel x2 mode)
• Quick memory programs can be recalled via MIDI
• Projects provide a convenient way to manage programs for each job
• Programs and projects can be saved on the Internal Card or PC Card
Storage
• PC Card slot fully compatible with the PC Card ATA specification and supports the
FAT16 file system
• CD-ROM drive supports ISO9660 Level 2 format
• PC Card and CD-ROM formats compatible with Windows
Editing
• Basic editing includes reverb time, initial delay, and reverb balance
• Advanced editing includes basic parameters plus pre-convolution 4-band PEQ,
post-convolution 4-band PEQ, and impulse-response data loading for each channel
• Reverb balance and level parameters can be controlled via MIDI
SREV1 Features
5
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Flexible I/O
• Two AES/EBU format inputs and outputs (providing 4 channels)
• Two mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots
• Optional mini YGDAI cards offer a variety of analog and digital I/O configurations,
with support for all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including
AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam
Optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller
• Control up to four SREV1s
• Large 320 x 240 dot display, with fluorescent backlight and adjustable brightness and
contrast
• Four motorized faders, data wheel, and INC/DEC buttons for parameter editing
• Input and output signal clip indicators
• Power supplied by the SREV1 (DC IN connector for use with optional AC adapter and
custom remote cables)
Others
• Yamaha CD-ROM library of famous venues from around the world
• SERIAL ports for multiple-unit operation
• MIDI IN and OUT ports
• BNC wordclock input
• 3U rack space
6
Chapter 1—Welcome
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Basics
Reverb Modes
The SREV1 offers three Reverb modes: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. In
2-channel mode, the SREV1 functions as a stereo reverb processor. Use this mode if all
you require is stereo outputs, as it offers the maximum convolution time per channel.
In 4-channel mode, the SREV1 offers 4-channel processing for surround reverb. In
2-channel x2 mode, the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo reverb processors
(A and B).
See page 34 for information on selecting Reverb modes.
The onboard AES/EBU inputs and mini YGDAI slot inputs can be freely assigned to
channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information.
Convolution Times
The following table shows the maximum convolution time available per channel for
each mode with and without the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board installed.
Convolution time is not the same as reverb time. Reverb time is the time it takes the
reverb to decay to –60 dB, and more convolution is required to provide reverberation
to –90 dB or –120 dB, so the convolution time must be between 1.5 and 2 times more
than the reverb time.
Impulse-Response Data
Impulse-response data contains the impulse-response information (i.e., acoustic char-
acteristics) of a measured environment. Preset programs come with their own
impulse-response data. Each channel of a program is assigned impulse-response data,
as shown below, and data can be loaded for channels individually on the Data Load
pages. See “Loading Impulse-Response Data” on page 61 for more information. The
impulse-response data for the preset programs is loaded into the Internal Card at the
factory. It’s also on the supplied CD-ROM.
Mode
Maximum Convolution Time per Channel (Fs = 48 kHz)
Base System
with DSP Expansion Board
(DB-SREV1)
2-channel
5.46 sec 10.92 sec
4-channel
2.73 sec 5.46 sec
2-channel x2
2.73 sec 5.46 sec
Left
2-channel program
4-channel program
Right
Front-left
Front-right
Rear-left
Rear-right
A-left
A-right
B-left
B-right
2-channel program x2
2-channel mode 4-channel mode 2-channel x2 mode
SREV1 Basics
7
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Programs
There are two types of reverb program: 2-channel and 4-channel. Two-channel pro-
grams are for use with 2-channel mode and 2-channel x2 mode, while 4-channel pro-
grams are for use only with 4-channel mode. In 2-channel mode, 4-channel programs
do not appear in the program lists and vice versa. The preset programs on the supplied
CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory. User programs can be stored
in the Quick memories, Internal Card or PC Card, where they can be write-protected.
Projects
Projects contain all the Quick memory programs and the current program settings and
free you to leave a project and come back to it at any time. Projects can be saved to the
Internal Card or PC Card, where they can be write-protected.
There are three types of project: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. Each project
type is available only when the corresponding mode is selected. You can’t, for example,
select a 2-channel project in 4-channel mode. Projects are managed on the Project
pages. See “Working with Projects” on page 48 for more information.
Quick Memories
Quick memories are special memories for storing programs. Unlike programs on the
Internal Card, PC Cards, and CD-ROMs, which take time to load, Quick memory pro-
grams can be recalled instantly. There are six Quick memories available in 2-channel or
4-channel mode; 12 in 2-channel x2 mode. Quick memories are managed on the Pro-
gram pages. See “Working with Quick Memories” on page 42 for more information.
8
Chapter 1—Welcome
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Drives
Programs, projects, and impulse-response data can be loaded from the following
drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. The number of programs that can be
stored on each drive depends on its capacity and the size of the associated
impulse-response data. Programs and drives are managed on the Library pages. See
“Working with the Library” on page 45 for more information.
The following diagram shows how programs and projects can be transferred to and
from the drives and Quick memories, and impulse-response data transferred from the
drives.
P01
P02
P03
P04
P06
PC ATA CARD
FLASH CARD
P05
Drives
CD-ROMPC CardInternal Card
Current program
Impulse-response
data
Project
Quick memories
See the Library pages for program and drive save/load operations
See the Project pages for project and drive save/load operations
See the Data Load pages for impulse-response data loading
See the Program pages for Quick memory store/recall operations
SREV1 Basics 9
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
File Types
The SREV1 uses several file extensions to identify file types. Although these extensions
do not generally appear on the RC-SREV1 pages, they may come in useful when check-
ing the contents of a PC Card or CD-ROM on your PC.
Parameters
SREV1 program parameters, such as reverb time, initial delay, an EQ, are stored within
each program. Saved parameters include: reverb time, initial delay, reverb balance,
reverb level, pre EQ, post EQ, and impulse-response data names.
Other parameters, including reverb mode, wordclock source, I/O select, I/O level, and
MIDI settings, are not stored within each program, but they are stored in the SREV1’s
battery-backed memory.
Output Assignments
The following table shows the fixed output assignments for each mode.
File
Extension
File Type
TM4 Impulse-response data (Yamaha original format)
TMC Compressed and encrypted impulse-response data (Yamaha original format)
SP2 2-channel program
SP4 4-channel program
2CH 2-channel mode project
4CH 4-channel mode project
2X2 2-channel x2 mode project
Mode Channel
Outputs
AES1 AES2 SLOT1 SLOT2
12121234567812345678
2-channel
Left •• •
Right •• •
4-channel
Front-left •• •
Front-right •• •
Rear-left •• •
Rear-right •• •
2-channel x2
A-left •• •
A-right •• •
B-left •• •
B-right •• •
10 Chapter 1—Welcome
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Block Diagram
AES/EBU
OUT 1
Input
Level
Input
Meter
Initial
Delay
Pre EQ
Post EQ
Bypass
(Rev Mute)
On
Off
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
AES/EBU
IN 2
AES/EBU
IN 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Input
Select
AES/EBU
OUT 2
Output
Meter
As above (Right, Front-right, A-right)
(Left, Front-left, A-left)
As above (Rear-left, B-left)
As above (Rear-right, B-right)
Bypass
(Direct Out)
On
Off
Reverb
Level
Reverb
Balance
Output
Level
Convo-
lution
Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 11
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
2
In this chapter...
SREV1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
RC-SREV1 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
RC-SREV1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
RC-SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
12 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Front Panel
A Air Inlet
The two internal cooling fans draw air into the SREV1 through this inlet. If the airflow
is restricted, the SREV1 may overheat, so make sure that it’s not blocked.
B INPUT and OUTPUT signal indicators
The INPUT and OUTPUT signal level indicators consist of SIGNAL and CLIP indica-
tors for each channel. The SIGNAL indicators light up when a signal is 34 dB below
clipping and are intended to show the presence of a signal, while the CLIP indicators
light up when a signal is actually clipping. See “Metering” on page 37 for more infor-
mation.
C FS LOCK indicators
These indicators show the sampling rate—48 kHz or 44.1 kHz—and whether or not
the SREV1 is locked to the selected wordclock source. See “Selecting the Wordclock
Source” on page 75 for more information.
D POWER switch & indicator
This switch is used to turn on the power to the SREV1. The POWER indicator lights up
when the SREV1 is turned on. See “Turning On & Off the SREV1” on page 26 for more
information.
E MEMORY CARD slot
PC Cards can be inserted here for loading and saving programs, projects, or
impulse-response data. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more information.
F Memory card eject button
This button is used to eject PC Cards. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more infor-
mation.
G Memory card activity indicator
This indicator lights up when the inserted PC Card is being written or read. See “Using
PC Cards” on page 29 for more information.
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
1 2 3 4
J9 K85 67
SREV1 Front Panel 13
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
H CD-ROM drive
The supplied CD-ROM, containing reverb programs, projects, and impulse-response
data, can be inserted here. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information.
I Disc activity indicator
This indicator lights up when the inserted CD-ROM is being read. See “Using
CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information.
J CD-ROM eject button
This button is used to eject CD-ROMs. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more
information.
K Emergency disc eject hole
This hole is used to manually eject CD-ROMs that cannot be ejected in the normal way.
Use a pin-like tool of 2 mm or less in diameter, insert it into the hole and push gently.
(A straightened paper clip makes an ideal tool.) Note that this technique should only be
used as a last resort. Frequent use may lead to malfunction.
14 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Rear Panel
A Cooling fan outlets
The two cooling fans expel air out through these outlets. If the airflow is restricted, the
SREV1 may overheat, so make sure these outlets are not blocked.
B SLOTs 1 & 2
These two slots are for use with optional mini YGDAI cards, offering a variety of analog
and digital I/O options. See “I/O Options” on page 81 for more information. Slot inputs
can be freely assigned to channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more informa-
tion.
C AC IN connector
This connector is used to connect the SREV1 to a suitable AC outlet by using the sup-
plied power cord. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 for more information.
D Grounding screw
For safety reasons, it’s important that the SREV1 is grounded properly. The supplied
power cord has a three-pin plug, and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is
grounded, then the SREV1 will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If the
AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, however, a ground connection should be
made to this grounding screw. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating
hum, interference, and other noise.
E DIGITAL OUT (AES/EBU) connectors
These two XLR-3-32-type connectors (AES1 and AES2) transmit up to four output sig-
nals, two per connection, as AES/EBU format digital audio. Output to channel assign-
ments are fixed. See “Output Assignments” on page 9 for more information. Use only
dedicated AES/EBU connecting cables (110Ω).
F DIGITAL IN (AES/EBU) connectors
These two XLR-3-31-type connectors (AES1 and AES2) receive up to four input sig-
nals, two per connection, as AES/EBU format digital audio. AES/EBU inputs can be
freely assigned to channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information.
Use only dedicated AES/EBU connecting cables (110Ω).
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
5
6 J987
3 4
21 1
SREV1 Rear Panel 15
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
G MIDI IN & OUT ports
These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports and are used to connect the SREV1 to other
MIDI equipment for remote operation using MIDI Program Change and Control
Change messages. See “MIDI & the SREV1” on page 68 for more information.
H SERIAL 1 & 2 ports
These 8-pin mini DIN connectors are used to connect up to four SREV1s in a multi-
ple-unit system. See “Multiple SREV1s” on page 63 for more information.
I REMOTE port
This 9-pin D-sub connector is used to connect the RC-SREV1. See “Connecting the
RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” on page 22 for more information.
J WORD CLOCK IN connector
This BNC connector can be used to receive an external wordclock signal. See “Wo rd -
clock Connections” on page 74 for more information.
16 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
RC-SREV1 Control Surface
A Display
See “RC-SREV1 Display” on page 18 for more information.
B BYPASS button & indicator
This button is used to bypass the SREV1. The BYPASS indicator lights up when the
SREV1 is bypassed. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more information.
C PROGRAM button
This button selects the Program, Library, and Project pages.
D PARAMETER MAIN button
This button selects the Main 1 and Main 2 pages.
E PARAMETER FINE button
This button selects the Rev, Pre EQ, and Post EQ pages.
F UTILITY button
This button selects the Setup, DIO, Meter I/O, and MIDI pages.
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
1
8
9
J
K
L
M
7
3
2
4
5
6
RC-SREV1 Control Surface 17
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
G Motorized faders
These four 60-mm motorized faders are for adjusting parameter values and input and
output levels.
H INPUT CLIP indicators
There are four INPUT CLIP indicators, one for each channel, which light up when the
corresponding channel’s input signal is clipping.
I OUTPUT CLIP indicators
There are four OUTPUT CLIP indicators, one for each channel, which light up when
the corresponding channel’s output signal is clipping.
J –1/DEC & +1/INC buttons
These buttons work in parallel with the DATA wheel and are used for selecting pro-
grams or projects and setting parameter values. Use the [–1/DEC] button to decrease a
value; the [+1/INC] button to increase it.
K DATA wheel
This wheel is used for selecting programs or projects and setting parameter values. Turn
it clockwise to increase a value; counterclockwise to decrease it.
L Cursor buttons ( / / / )
These buttons are used to maneuver the cursor around the display pages in order to
select buttons and parameters. The left ( ) button moves the cursor to the left; the
right ( ) button moves it to the right; the up ( ) button moves it up; the down ( )
button moves it down.
M ENTER button
This button is used to execute functions and set options and parameters.
18 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
RC-SREV1 Display
This large 320 x 240 dot display, with fluorescent backlight and adjustable brightness
and contrast controls, displays the various program, parameter, and utility pages, sys-
tem status, and signal level meters. As well as showing parameter values numerically,
reverb and EQ parameters are displayed graphically, so you can see settings at a glance.
Page title—This is the title of the currently selected page.
Program number & title—This is the number and title of the current program. In
2-channel x2 mode, two numbers and titles are displayed, one for program A, the other
for program B. Program numbers appear only when programs are recalled or stored in
Quick memory. They do not appear when programs are loaded from a drive (i.e., Inter-
nal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM).
Page tabs—Pages are grouped as program, parameter main, parameter fine, and util-
ity, and these tabs show the titles of the pages available in each group.
Main page area—The various program, parameter, and utility pages appear here.
Bypass status—The status of the Bypass function appears here: ON (SREV1
bypassed) or OFF. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more information.
FS status—The SREV1 sampling rate is displayed here—48 kHz or 44.1 kHz—and
whether or not it’s locked to the selected wordclock source—LOCK or UNLOCK. See
“Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information.
Selected SREV1—This is the SREV1 currently selected for control from the
RC-SREV1. See “Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1” on page 65 for more informa-
tion.
Reverb mode—This is the current Reverb mode: 2CH, 4CH, or 2CHX2.
Edit status—The Edit status indicator shows whether or not the current reverb pro-
gram has been edited since is was recalled. If it has, the word “EDIT” appears (the letter
“E” appears in 2-channel x2 mode).
Meters—In 2-channel mode, input and output meters for the left and right channels
are displayed here. In 4-channel mode, meters for the front-left, front-right, rear-left,
and rear-right channels are displayed. In 2-channel x2 mode, meters for the A-left,
A-right, B-left, and B-right channels are displayed. For the 4-channel and 2-channel x2
modes, you can choose to display input or output meters. See “Metering” on page 37
for more information.
Reverb mode
Page title
Bypass status
Page tabs
Main page area
Meters
FS status
Edit status
Selected SREV1
Program number & title
RC-SREV1 Display 19
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Fader status—The status of each fader appears along the bottom of the display. For
pages selected with the [PARAMETER MAIN] button, the names of the parameters
assigned to the faders appear, and for pages selected with the [PARAMETER FINE]
button, the channel names appear, as shown below.
Parameter
Channel
20 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
RC-SREV1 Rear Panel
A POWER switch
This switch is used to turn on the power to the RC-SREV1. Power is supplied by the
SREV1 via the remote cable, or an optional AC adapter. See “Turning On & Off the
RC-SREV1” on page 26 for more information.
B DC 12V IN connector
An optional AC adapter can be connected here (necessary when a custom-made remote
cable is used). See “Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter” on page 27 for more
information.
C Adapter cable clip
This clip is used to secure the optional AC adapter’s cable in order to prevent accidental
disconnection. See “Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter” on page 27 for more
information.
D REMOTE port
This 9-pin D-sub connector is used to connect the RC-SREV1 to the SREV1 with the
remote cable supplied with the RC-SREV1. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote
Controller” on page 22 for more information.
E BRIGHT control
This control is used to adjust the brightness of the display. See “Adjusting the
RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast” on page 27 for more information.
F CONT control
This control is used to adjust the contrast of the display. See “Adjusting the RC-SREV1
Brightness & Contrast” on page 27 for more information.
1 2 3 4 5 6
BRIGHT CONT
LCD
REMOTEDC 12V INPOWER
ON OFF
Getting Started 21
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Getting Started
3
In this chapter...
First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Turning On & Off the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
22 Chapter 3—Getting Started
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
First Steps
Here’s how to get up and running with the SREV1.
1 Familiarize yourself with the SREV1 and RC-SREV1.
See “Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1” on page 11.
2 Install any mini YGDAI I/O cards.
See “I/O Options” on page 81.
3 Connect the RC-SREV1.
See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” below.
4 Connect your audio equipment to the inputs and outputs.
See “Hookup Examples” on page 23.
5 Connect the power cord and turn on the SREV1.
See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 and “Turning On & Off the SREV1” on
page 26.
6 Turn on the RC-SREV1 and Adjust the brightness and contrast.
See “Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1” on page 26 and “Adjusting the RC-SREV1
Brightness & Contrast” on page 27.
The SREV1 is now ready for use.
Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller
The RC-SREV1 should be connected to the SREV1 using the supplied 9-pin D-sub
remote cable, as shown below. In addition to control signals, the cable carries power for
the RC-SREV1, so make sure it’s attached securely.
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
BRIGHT CONT
LCD
REMOTEDC 12V INPOWER
ON OFF
Remote cable
Hookup Examples 23
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Hookup Examples
This section contains several hookup examples for both digital and analog I/O.
Two-channel AES/EBU I/O
This example shows how a digital mixer with AES/EBU format I/O can be connected to
the SREV1’s onboard AES/EBU I/O for two-channel operation. The input feed can be
used to carry one or two digital-audio signals, allowing either 1 in/2 out or 2 in/2 out
operation.
Four-channel AES/EBU I/O
This example shows how a digital mixer with AES/EBU format I/O can be connected to
the SREV1’s onboard AES/EBU I/O for four-channel operation. Each input feed can be
used to carry one or two digital-audio signals, four signals in total, allowing 1 in/4 out,
2 in/4 out, 4 in/4 out operation (4-channel mode), or 1 in/2 out x2 or 2 in/2 out x2
operation (2-channel x2 mode).
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
REMOTE
AES/EBU
AES/EBU
1
1
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
RC-SREV1
SREV1
SREV1 settings
Reverb mode: 2-channel
Input assignment: AES1 (1–2)
Wordclock source: AES/EBU 1
Remote cable
Digital
Mixer
Aux send (AES/EBU)
Aux return/stereo in (AES/EBU)
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
SREV1
REMOTE
AES/EBU
AES/EBU
12
12
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
RC-SREV1
SREV1 settings
Reverb mode: 4-channel or 2-channel x2
Input assignment: AES1 (1–2), AES2 (1–2)
Wordclock source: AES/EBU 1
Remote cable
Digital
Mixer
Aux send (AES/EBU)
Aux return/stereo in (AES/EBU)
24 Chapter 3—Getting Started
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Optional I/O Card Digital I/O
This example shows how a digital mixer with an AES/EBU connector can be connected
to the SREV1 by using optional AES/EBU cards (MY8-AE). Up to four digital-audio
input and output signals can be carried, allowing virtually any input/output configura-
tion (e.g., 1 in/2 out, 2 in/4 out, 2 in/2 out x2, and so on).
Two-channel Analog I/O
This example shows how an analog mixer, or digital mixer with analog I/O, can be con-
nected to the SREV1 by using optional A/D and D/A I/O cards (MY4-AD and
MY4-DA) for two-channel operation. One or two analog audio signals can be input
and output, allowing 1 in/2 out or 2 in/2 out operation.
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
RC-SREV1
REMOTE
AES/EBU
DIGITAL I/O CARD
MODEL MY8-AE
AES/EBU
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
SREV1
SREV1 settings
Reverb mode: 2-channel, 4-channel, or 2-channel x2
Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–8)
Wordclock source: MY8-AE 1/2
AES/EBU card
*Alternatives:
MY8-AT (ADAT format)
MY8-TD (Tascam format)
*MY8-AE card
(AES/EBU)
Remote cable
Digital
Mixer
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
ANALOG OUT
DA CARD
MODEL MY4-DA
4 3 2 1
SREV1
REMOTE
ANALOG IN
AD CARD
MODEL MY4-AD
4 3 2 1
12
12
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
RC-SREV1
SREV1 settings
Reverb mode: 2-channel
Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–2)
Wordclock source: INT 48K
Remote cable
Analog/
Digital
Mixer
Aux send (analog)
Aux return/stereo in (analog)
MY4-AD card
(analog)
MY4-DA card
(analog)
Hookup Examples 25
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Four-channel Analog I/O
This example shows how an analog mixer, or digital mixer with analog I/O, can be con-
nected to the SREV1 by using optional A/D and D/A I/O cards (MY4-AD and
MY4-DA) for four-channel operation. Between one and four channels can be used,
allowing 1 in/4 out, 2 in/4 out, 4 in/4 out (4-channel mode), or 1 in/2 out x2 or 2 in/2
out x2 (2-channel x2 mode).
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
INOUT
3
12
2
3
1
1212
2
3
1
3
12
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
SREV1
REMOTE
ANALOG IN
AD CARD
MODEL MY4-AD
4 3 2 1
ANALOG OUT
DA CARD
MODEL MY4-DA
4 3 2 1
1234
1234
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
RC-SREV1
SREV1 settings
Reverb mode: 4-channel or 2-channel x2
Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–4)
Wordclock source: INT 48K
Remote cable
MY4-AD card
(analog)
MY4-DA card
(analog)
Analog/
Digital
Mixer
Aux send (analog)
Aux return/stereo in (analog)
26 Chapter 3—Getting Started
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Connecting the Power Cord
Connect the socket-end of the supplied power cord to the AC IN
socket on the rear panel of the SREV1. Connect the plug-end to a
suitable AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the power supply
requirements stated on the SREV1 rear panel.
Turning On & Off the SREV1
To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your
audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when
turning off)—sound sources, SREV1, RC-SREV1, recorder, mixer,
monitoring power amplifiers.
1 To turn on the SREV1, press the [POWER] switch.
The POWER indicator lights up.
See “SREV1 Startup” on page 32 and “About the Internal Operations
at Startup” on page 33 for more information.
2 To turn off the SREV1, press the [POWER] switch again.
The POWER indicator goes out.
Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1
1 To turn on the RC-SREV1, set its [POWER] switch to the ON
position.
The startup screen appears, and after communication is established
between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1, the Program page appears.
See “RC-SREV1 Startup” on page 32 for more information.
2 To turn off the RC-SREV1, set its [POWER] switch to the OFF
position.
The RC-SREV1 receives its power from the SREV1 via the remote
cable, so if it doesn’t come on, make sure that the remote cable is con-
nected properly and that the SREV1 is turned on.
Warning: Turn off all equipment before making any power connections.
Note: In general, set the RC-SREV1 POWER switch to the ON position and use the
SREV1 POWER switch to turn on and off the system. When using a custom-made remote
cable, and an optional AC adapter, if the RC-SREV1 is turned on before the SREV1, the
SREV1 must be turned on within 50 seconds. During this time the message “COULD
NOT COMMUNICATE WITH SREV1. CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTION AND
SREV1’S POWER. THEN TURN ON RC-SREV1 AGAIN.” appears. Therefore, turn on
the RC-SREV1 after the SREV1.
POWER
ON OFF
POWER
ON OFF
Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter 27
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter
The remote cable, which carries power from the SREV1 to the RC-SREV1, is 20 meters
in length. Since the power loss in longer cables would be too great, an optional Yamaha
PA-6 AC power supply adapter (12 V DC) is required to power the RC-SREV1 when
using remote cables over 20 meters in length. A wiring diagram for making custom
remote cables is available on page 91. See your Yamaha dealer for more information.
The optional Yamaha PA-6 AC power supply adapter should be con-
nected to the DC 12V IN connector on the rear of the RC-SREV1.
Loop the AC adapter cable around cable clip,
shown here, to prevent accidental disconnection.
Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast
Both the brightness and contrast of the RC-SREV1 display can
be adjusted to suit your working environment or personal
preference.
1 Use the CONT control to set the display contrast.
Contrast adjusts the balance between pixels that are on and
those that are off.
2 Use the BRIGHT control to set the display brightness.
Brightness adjusts the strength of the display’s backlight.
Warning: Use only the Yamaha PA-6 AC power
supply adapter with the RC-SREV1. Using any
other AC adapter may cause a fault, leading to a
buildup of heat, fire, or an electrical shock hazard.
DC 12V IN
BRIGHT CONT
LCD
REMOTEDC 12V INPOWER
ON OFF
DC
12V IN
BRIGHT CONT
LCD
28 Chapter 3—Getting Started
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Using CD-ROMs
The SREV1 can load programs, projects, and impulse-response data files stored on
ISO9660 Level 2 format CD-ROMs, which are also supported by Windows.
Inserting & Ejecting CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs can only be inserted and ejected while the SREV1 is turned on.
1 Press the CD-ROM eject button, and when the disc tray appears, pull it out.
2 With the labeled-side facing up, carefully fit the disc onto the central spindle.
(The disc sits flat when it’s in correctly.)
3 Push the disc tray fully into the SREV1 to close it.
When a CD-ROM is being read, the activity indicator lights up.
The SREV1 takes between 20 and 30 seconds to recognize a CD-ROM after it’s inserted.
4 To eject a CD-ROM, press the eject button.
5 When the disc tray appears, pull it out, remove the disc, and then push the
tray back into the SREV1 in order to close it.
Always store CD-ROMs in their cases.
CD-ROM
Using PC Cards 29
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Using PC Cards
The SREV1 can store
programs, projects,
and
impulse-response
data on standard PC Cards (PCMCIA). The SREV1 supports the
PC Card ATA specification and the FAT16 file system, which is
also supported by Windows. Use PCMCIA flash ATA cards (Type
II) or CompactFlash cards with a PC Card adapter.
Inserting & Ejecting PC Cards
1 Insert the PC Card face up into the MEMORY CARD slot and push it in all the
way. (The eject button sticks out all the way when the card is fully inserted.)
The PC Card should be recognized and available for use in a few seconds.
Although rare, in some cases the PC Card may not be recognized. If this happens, try
reinserting the card. If it’s not recognized after several tries, contact your Yamaha dealer.
When a card is being written or read, the activity indicator lights up. Do not eject the
card, or turn off the power while this indicator is lit.
2 To eject a card, make sure that the activity indicator is not lit, and then press
the eject button.
The card ejects.
3 Remove the card from the slot.
When using a compact card with an adapter, pull the adapter to remove the card from
the slot. Pulling only the card may damage it.
The speed at which data can be written and read on a PC Card depends on its type.
Always store PC Cards in their cases.
PC ATA CARD
FLASH CARD
MEMORY CARD
Basic Operation 31
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
4
In this chapter...
SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RC-SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About the Internal Operations at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting Reverb Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assigning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting Input & Output Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting the Meter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bypassing the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using the Title Edit dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Working with Quick Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Working with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
32 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
SREV1 Startup
When the SREV1 is turned on, its INPUT and OUTPUT signal indicators light up in
sequence. During this time, the SREV1 loads impulse-response data for the current
program and the programs in Quick memory from the Internal Card, and, if necessary,
from the PC Card or CD-ROM. At this time, the SREV1 cannot be used. After about 30
seconds, when the necessary impulse-response data has been loaded, the CLIP and
SIGNAL indicators go out and the SREV1 is ready for use.
Note that the startup time will be different if the current program or the programs in
Quick memory are on PC Card or CD-ROM.
If the SREV1 does not output any sound, check your audio connections, and the input
assignments. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information.
RC-SREV1 Startup
In Principle, the RC-SREV1 should be started up after the SREV1 has completed its
startup. However, when the RC-SREV1 is connected to one SREV1 using the supplied
remote cable, and that SREV1 is supplying power to the RC-SREV1, so long as the
RC-SREV1 POWER switch is set to the ON position, the RC-SREV1 will be turned on
at the same time as the SREV1 is turned on, and the RC-SREV1 will startup normally.
If, however, you are using multiple SREV1s, connected together using serial cables,
make sure that all SREV1s have completed startup before turning on the RC-SREV1.
When the RC-SREV1 is turned on, startup screen 1 appears for one second. Then star-
tup screen 2 appears with an animated waveform moving from left to right. During this
time, the RC-SREV1 receives necessary operating information from the SREV1 via the
serial cable. When all the information has been received, the Program page appears.
When the RC-SREV1 is turned on after the SREV1 has completed its startup, the above
procedure takes 15 seconds.
When the RC-SREV1 is turned on at the same time as the SREV1, it takes 45 seconds to
start up, although the actual time will depend on the time it takes the SREV1 to start up.
If there is no animation on startup screen 2, there may be a communication error
between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1. In this case, turn off both units and check the
remote cable connections, also check for breaks in the cable.
Startup screen 1 Startup screen 2
About the Internal Operations at Startup 33
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
About the Internal Operations at Startup
During startup, the SREV1 loads the necessary programs into the current and Quick
program memories in order to restore the SREV1 to the same state it was in before it
was last turned off. If any of these programs were previously loaded from a PC Card or
CD-ROM and then stored to a Quick memory, the same PC Card or CD-ROM will be
required to restore the contents of the Quick memories. In this case, be sure to insert
the necessary PC Card or CD-ROM before starting the SREV1. Although the SREV1’s
battery-backed memory stores the titles of the current and Quick memory programs,
it does not store the actual program or impulse-response data, so this must be loaded
each time the SREV1 is started.
If a necessary PC Card or CD-ROM is not inserted, the message “DATA FILE NOT
FOUND! INSERT PCMCIA CARD” or “DATA FILE NOT FOUND! INSERT
CD-ROM DISC” appears once the RC-SREV1 has completed startup. In this case,
insert the necessary PC Card or CD-ROM and try loading again.
Note that the above information regarding necessary PC Cards and CD-ROMs also
applies to changing the Reverb mode and loading projects.
34 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Reverb Modes
This section explains how to select the 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2 Reverb
modes. See page 6 for more information about each mode.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Setup page shown below.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the 2CH, 4CH, or 2CHX2 button in the REV
MODE section of the page.
3 Press the [ENTER] button.
A confirmation message appears.
4 Select YES to continue, or select NO to cancel the operation.
5 Press the [ENTER] button.
While the SREV1 switches to the selected Reverb mode, the RC-SREV1 displays the
message “SETTING REV MODE...” and the SREV1 INPUT and OUTPUT signal indi-
cators light up in sequence.
Once the mode has been set, the mode title appears in the Reverb mode section of the
display, the Program page is selected, and the cursor appears at the same position it does
when the power is turned on.
The SREV1 switches to the selected mode, the mode title appears in the Reverb mode
section of the display, and the Program page is selected.
The SREV1 stores all program parameters when the mode is changed, so when you
return to a mode, the previous settings are restored.
Note: Do not insert or eject a PC Card or CD-ROM while the SREV1 is changing Reverb
modes.
Reverb mode
Assigning Inputs 35
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Inputs
This section explains how to assign the AES/EBU inputs and slot inputs to channels.
When a four input I/O card, such as the MY4-AD, is installed, only the first four inputs
of that slot are available.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the DIO page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the dots in the INPUT SELECT section of the
page.
A dotted circle indicates that an input is assignable; two dots indicate that an input is
unavailable.
3 Press the [ENTER] button to assign an input to a channel.
The input is assigned to the channel and the dotted circle changes to a solid dot.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
36 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Setting Input & Output Levels
Input and output signal levels can be set on two different pages: Main 2 page or Meter
I/O page. On the Main 2 page, levels are adjusted for all channels simultaneously as a
group, while on the Meter I/O page, they can be adjusted for each channel individually.
This section explains how to adjust input and output levels on the Meter I/O page. See
page 54 for information on the Main 2 page.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT LEVEL and OUTPUT LEVEL param-
eters for each channel.
3 Use the faders to set the levels.
The DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons can also be used to set levels in
0.1 dB steps.
The input and output levels can be set from –∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB in steps of 0.1 dB.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
Metering 37
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Metering
Input and output signal levels can be metered in several places: the 14-segment meters
on the RC-SREV1 display pages, the 11-segment meters on the Meter I/O page, the
SIGNAL and CLIP indicators on the SREV1, and the CLIP indicators on the
RC-SREV1. The Peak Hold function works with all of these meters. See “Using Peak
Hold” on page 39 for more information.
14-segment Meters
Input and output signal levels can be metered by using the 14-segment meters that
appear on most RC-SREV1 display pages. In 2-channel mode, input and output signal
levels can be metered simultaneously. In 4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode, however,
either the input or output levels can be metered, not both simultaneously. See “Setting
the Meter Mode” on page 39 for more information.
The 14-segment LCD meters have the following resolution: CLIP / –3dB / –6dB / –9dB
/ –12dB / –15dB / –18dB / –24dB / –30dB / –36dB / –42dB / –48dB / –54dB / –60dB.
The following table shows how the input and output meters appear in each mode.
Mode 2-channel 4-channel 2-channel x2
Meter
I/O
INPUT &
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
Use the METER MODE option on the Meter I/O page to switch
between OUTPUT and INPUT (see page 39).
Channels
Left, right
Front-left, front-right,
rear-left, rear-right
A-left, A-right, B-left, B-right
38 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Meter I/O Page
Input and output signal levels for all channels can be metered by using the 11-segment
meters on the Meter I/O pages shown below, which are located by using the [UTILITY]
button.
The 11-segment LCD meters have the following resolution:
CLIP, –3 dB, –6dB, –9 dB, –12dB, –15 dB, –18dB, –24 dB, –30dB, –36 dB, –42dB
SREV1 SIGNAL and CLIP indicators
Input and output signal levels for each channel can be metered by using the SIGNAL
and CLIP indicators on the SREV1 front panel. The SIGNAL indicators light up when
the signal is 34 dB below clipping and are intended to show the presence of a signal,
while the CLIP indicators light up when the signal is actually clipping.
RC-SREV1 CLIP indicators
Input and output signal levels for each channel can be metered for clipping by using the
CLIP indicators on the RC-SREV1. These indicators light up when a signal is clipping.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH 1 2 3 4
Setting the Meter Mode 39
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Meter Mode
In 4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode, the 14-segment meters that appear on most
RC-SREV1 display pages can be set to display either input or output signal levels by
using the METER MODE option.
In 2-channel mode, meters for both the inputs and outputs (left and right) are always
displayed, so the METER MODE option is not available when this mode is selected.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the METER MODE button.
3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between INPUT and OUTPUT mode.
The 14-segment meters are set accordingly.
Using Peak Hold
By keeping the highest lit segment of each meter illuminated, the Peak Hold function
offers a convenient way to check for signal peaks. In addition to the meters on the
RC-SREV1 display pages, the Peak Hold function also works with the dedicated CLIP
indicators on the SREV1 and RC-SREV1.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PEAK HOLD button.
3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between OFF and ON.
The Peak Hold function is set accordingly.
To reset the Peak Hold function, turn it off and then back on again.
40 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Bypassing the SREV1
The SREV1 can be bypassed by using the [BYPASS] button. When the bypass function
is on, the BYPASS indicator lights up and the word “ON” appears in the BYPASS area
of the display, as shown below.
Setting the Bypass Mode
The Bypass function can be set so that it bypasses all processing (Direct-out) or just
mutes the reverb processing (Rev-mute), in which case output signals are still affected
by the Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the BYPASS MODE button.
3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between DIRECT-OUT and REV-MUTE.
The Bypass mode is set accordingly.
Bypass BYPASS Button Display SREV1
Off
Normal operation
On
Bypassed
1
1. Depends on the Bypass mode: Direct-out/Rev-mute. See below.
BYPASS
BYPASS
Input
Level
Input
Meter
Initial
Delay
Bypass
(Rev Mute)
On
Off
Output
Meter
Bypass
(Direct Out)
On
Off
Reverb
Level
Reverb
Balance
Output
Level
Pre EQ
Post EQ
Convo-
lution
Bypass status
Using the Title Edit dialog Box 41
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Using the Title Edit dialog Box
The Title Edit dialog box is used to title programs and projects, and it appears automat-
ically when saving programs or projects, or when editing the titles of existing programs
or projects. Titles can contain up to 27 characters, and both uppercase and lowercase
letters and the plus (+) and minus (–) symbols are available.
Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to move the cursor within the
title.
Use the CAPS LOCK button to access the lowercase and uppercase letters.
To enter a character, use the cursor buttons to select it, and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton. The selected character is inserted into the title at the cursor position and the cursor
automatically moves one place to the right.
Use the SPC button to enter a space at the cursor position.
Use the INS button to insert a space at the cursor position and move the subsequent
characters to the right. Characters that are moved beyond the right-hand side of the
title window are lost.
Use the DEL button to delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent
characters to the left.
When you’ve finished editing, select the OK button and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton. (The message “CHANGING TITLE...” appears as the title is changed.) To cancel
the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press the [ENTER] button.
Uppercase Lowercase
42 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Working with Quick Memories
This section explains how to recall, store, title, and protect programs in Quick memory.
All these operations are carried out on the Program pages shown below. In 2-channel
x2 mode, two Program pages are available: Program-A and Program-B. There are six
Quick memories available in 2-channel or 4-channel mode (P01–P06); 12 in 2-channel
x2 mode (P01–P12). In the program list, a dotted box highlights the selected program.
Recalling Programs
Programs stored in Quick memories can be recalled instantly. The recalled program
becomes the current program.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page.
2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program
from the list.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL button, and then press [ENTER].
If the current program contains unsaved changes, a warning message appears. Select
YES to discard the changes and recall the selected program, or select NO to cancel the
operation.
The selected program is recalled and its number and title appear on the display.
In 2-channel x2 mode, when a program is recalled for reverberator A, reverberator B is
muted, unless the optional DB-SREV1 Expansion Board is installed.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
Working with Quick Memories 43
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Storing Programs
The current program can be stored to any Quick memory.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page.
2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Quick
memory.
Programs cannot be stored to Quick memories containing write-protected programs.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE button, and then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4 Enter a title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
The current program is stored to the selected Quick memory, and the Edit status indi-
cator disappears (see page 18).
Editing Program Titles
The titles of programs already stored in the Quick memories can be edited as follows.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page.
2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a pro-
gram.
The titles of write-protected programs cannot be edited.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press
[ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4 Edit the title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
Note that the “CHANGING TITLE...” message does not appear in this case.
The new title is stored.
44 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Protecting Quick Memory Programs
Quick memory programs can be write-protected to prevent accidental overwriting.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page.
2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a pro-
gram.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER].
The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the program’s title.
4 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the program.
The Protect icon disappears.
Working with the Library 45
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Working with the Library
This section explains how to load, save, title, protect, and delete programs from the
Internal Card, PC Card, and CD-ROM. These operations are carried out on the Library
pages shown below. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Library pages are available: Library-A
and Library-B. In the program list, a dotted box highlights the selected program. In the
DRIVE section of the page, INTERNAL is the Internal Card, CD-ROM is the CD-ROM
drive, and PCMCIA is the PC Card.
Loading Programs from the Library
Programs can be loaded from the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or
CD-ROM. The loaded program becomes the current program. The preset programs on
the supplied CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program
from the list.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the LOAD button, and then press [ENTER].
If the current program contains unsaved changes, a warning message appears. Select
YES to discard the changes and load the selected program, or select NO to cancel the
operation.
The selected program, and its impulse-response data, is loaded and its title appears on
the display.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
46 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Note that unlike the Quick memory programs, which load instantly, programs stored
on the drives take time to load, depending on the size of the associated
impulse-response data and the speed of the drive.
In 2-channel x2 mode, when a program is loaded for reverberator A, reverberator B is
muted, unless the optional DB-SREV1 Expansion Board is installed.
Saving Programs in the Library
The current program can be saved to the following drives: Internal Card or PC Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4 Enter a title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
If a program with the same title already exists, a confirmation dialog box appears. Select
YES to overwrite the existing program, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that
if the existing program is write-protected, it cannot be overwritten.
The current program, and its impulse-response data, is saved to the selected drive, and
the Edit status indicator disappears (see page 18).
Editing Program Titles in the Library
The titles of programs stored on the following drives can be edited: Internal Card or PC
Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a pro-
gram.
The titles of write-protected programs cannot be edited.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press
[ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
5 Edit the title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
6 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
The new title is saved.
Working with the Library 47
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Protecting Library Programs
Programs stored on the following drives can be write-protected to prevent accidental
deletion: Internal Card or PC Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a pro-
gram.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER].
The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the program’s title.
5 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the program.
The Protect icon disappears.
Deleting Library Programs
Programs stored on the following drives can be deleted: Internal Card or PC Card. The
preset programs loaded into the Internal Card at the factory are also available on the
supplied CD-ROM.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a pro-
gram.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER].
A confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to delete the program, or select NO to
cancel the operation. Note that if the program is write-protected, it cannot be deleted.
The program, and its impulse-response data, is deleted and disappears from the list. If
the impulse-response data is required by another program, it’s not deleted.
48 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Working with Projects
This section explains how to load, save, title, protect, and delete projects from the Inter-
nal, PC Card, and CD-ROM drives. All these operations are carried out on the Project
pages shown below. In the project list, a dotted box highlights the selected project. See
page 7 for more information about projects.
Loading Projects
Projects can be loaded from the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project
from the list.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the LOAD button, and then press [ENTER].
A confirmation message appears. Select YES to load the project, or select NO to cancel
the operation.
The message “LOADING PROJECT...” appears while the selected project and its pro-
grams are loaded. The Program page appears when loading, which takes about 30 sec-
onds, is complete.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
Working with Projects 49
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Saving Projects
Projects, which consist of all the Quick memory programs and the current program set-
tings, can be saved to the following drives: Internal Card or PC Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The projects already stored on the active drive appear in the project list.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4 Enter a title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
If a project with the same title already exists, a confirmation dialog box appears. Select
YES to overwrite the existing project, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that if
the existing project is write-protected it cannot be overwritten.
The project is saved to the selected drive.
Editing Project Titles
The titles of projects stored on the following drives can be edited: Internal Card or PC
Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project.
The titles of write-protected projects cannot be edited.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press
[ENTER].
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
5 Edit the title.
See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information.
6 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER].
(To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].)
The new title is saved.
50 Chapter 4—Basic Operation
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Protecting Projects
Projects stored on the following drives can be write-protected to prevent accidental
deletion: Internal Card or PC Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER].
The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the project’s title.
5 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the project.
The Protect icon disappears.
Deleting Projects
Projects stored on the following drives can be deleted: Internal Card or PC Card.
1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list.
3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER].
A confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to delete the project, or select NO to can-
cel the operation. Note that if the project is write-protected, it cannot be deleted.
The selected project is deleted and disappears from the list.
Editing Programs 51
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Editing Programs
5
In this chapter...
Main 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Main 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fine Reverb Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Pre EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Post EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Loading Impulse-Response Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
52 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Main 1 Parameters
Basic parameters, including Reverb Time, Initial Delay, Pre EQ Low Gain, and Pre EQ
High Gain, can be adjusted on the Main 1 pages. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Main 1
pages are available: Main1-A and Main1-B. Channels are grouped, so adjusting, say, the
Reverb Time parameter, adjusts the reverb time of all channels simultaneously. In
2-channel x2 mode, A and B parameters are grouped independently. These parameters
can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Fine parameter pages. See page 56
and page 57 for more information.
The graphs and parameter values of only one channel are displayed at a time. You can
choose which channel by using the buttons in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section of the
page. Below that section is the REV graph, which displays the reverb parameter settings
graphically, and the PRE-EQ graph, which displays the Pre EQ settings graphically. If
the EQ is turned off on the Pre EQ page (see page 57), the EQ graph appears shaded.
The Main 1 pages for each mode are shown below.
1 Use the [PARAMETER MAIN] button to locate the Main 1 page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a channel button in the DISPLAY CHANNEL
section, and then press the [ENTER] button to make it the active display chan-
nel.
The button of the active display channel appears highlighted.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV TIME, INITIAL DELAY, LOW-EQ, or
HIGH-EQ parameter.
4 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the
selected parameter.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
Main 1 Parameters 53
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Note that since adjustments to the REV TIME parameter do not take effect immedi-
ately, there is a small delay between adjusting the reverb time by using, for example, a
fader and the new reverb time being applied.
The parameter ranges are as follows.
The following waveforms show the reverb produced by a snare drum with reverb times
of 500 milliseconds and 2.0 seconds. Initial delay is 0.1 milliseconds; reverb balance is
100%. The third waveform shows how reflections can be delayed by using the Initial
Delay parameter. Here the reverb time is 2.0 seconds; initial delay is 200 ms (exagger-
ated for illustration clarity); and the reverb balance is 50%.
Parameter Range Steps Description
REV TIME
0.3–
1
1. Actual maximum reverb time depends on the impulse-response data.
0.1 sec Reverb time
INITIAL DELAY
0.1–500.0 ms 0.1 ms Initial delay time
LOW-EQ
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB 0.1 dB Pre EQ low gain
HIGH-EQ
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB 0.1 dB Pre EQ high gain
Time
Amplitude Reverb time: 500 ms
Initial delay: 0.1 ms
Reverb balance: 100%
Time
Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec
Initial delay: 0.1 ms
Reverb balance: 100%
Time
Amplitude
Direct signal
Reflections
Initial delay
Reverb time: 2.0 sec
Initial delay: 200 ms
Reverb balance: 50%
54 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Main 2 Parameters
Basic parameters, including Reverb Balance, Input Level, Output Level, and Pre EQ
HPF frequency, can be adjusted on the Main 2 pages. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Main
2 pages are available: Main2-A and Main2-B. Channels are grouped, so adjusting, say,
the Reverb Balance parameter, adjusts the reverb balance of all channels simulta-
neously. In 2-channel x2 mode, A and B parameters are grouped independently. These
parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Fine parameter pages.
See page 56 and page 57 for more information.
The graphs and parameter values of only one channel are displayed at a time. You can
choose which channel by using the buttons in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section of the
page. Below that section is the REV graph, which displays the reverb parameter settings
graphically, and the PRE-EQ graph, which displays the Pre EQ settings graphically. If
the EQ is turned off on the Pre EQ page (see page 57), the EQ graph appears shaded.
Likewise, if the HPF filter type parameter is set to THRU on the Pre EQ page, that also
appears shaded.
The Main 2 pages for each mode are shown below.
1 Use the [PARAMETER MAIN] button to locate the Main 2 page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a channel button in the DISPLAY CHANNEL
section, and then press the [ENTER] button to make it the active display chan-
nel.
The button of the active display channel appears highlighted.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV BALANCE, INPUT LEVEL, OUTPUT
LEVEL, or HPF parameter.
4 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the
selected parameter.
2-ch mode
4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
Main 2 Parameters 55
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
The parameter ranges are as follows.
Reverb Balance
The following waveforms illustrate the effect of the Reverb Balance parameter. The
sound source is a snare drum
Parameter Range Steps Description
REV BALANCE
0–100% 1%
Balance between reverb and dry
signals. 0% = all dry, 100% = all
reverb.
INPUT LEVEL
–∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Input level
OUTPUT LEVEL
–∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Output level
HPF
16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz 1/12 oct Pre EQ HPF frequency
Time
Amplitude
Direct signal
Reverb time: 2.0 sec
Initial delay: 0.1 ms
Reverb balance: 0%
Direct signal & reflections
All reflections
Time
Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec
Initial delay: 0.1 ms
Reverb balance: 50%
Time
Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec
Initial delay: 0.1 ms
Reverb balance: 100%
56 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Fine Reverb Parameters
Reverb Time, Initial Delay, Reverb Balance, and Reverb Level parameters can be
adjusted for each channel individually on the Rev page, although there is an option to
group them. In addition to numeric values, settings are displayed graphically.
The Rev pages for each mode are shown below.
1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Rev page.
Use the ON/OFF button in the GROUP section to group and ungroup the channels.
When set to ON, all channels are adjusted simultaneously. When set to OFF, channels
can be adjusted individually.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV TIME, INITIAL DELAY, REV BALANCE,
or REV LEVEL parameter.
3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the
selected parameter.
Note that since adjustments to the REV TIME parameter do not take effect immedi-
ately, there is a small delay between adjusting the reverb time by using, for example, a
fader and the new reverb time being applied, especially when channels are grouped.
The parameter ranges are as follows.
Parameter Range Steps Description
REV TIME
0.3–
1
1. Actual maximum reverb time depends on the impulse-response data.
0.1 sec Reverb time
INITIAL DELAY
0.1–500.0 ms 0.1 ms Delay before reverb starts
REV BALANCE
0–100% 1%
Balance between reverb and dry
signals. 0% = all dry, 100% = all
reverb.
REV LEVEL
–∞, –72 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Reverb level
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
Pre EQ 57
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Pre EQ
The pre-convolution EQ consists of a variable frequency HPF and fully parametric
3-band EQ. Parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Pre EQ
pages. In 4-channel mode, two Pre EQ pages are available: Pre EQ Front and Pre EQ
Rear. Likewise, in 2-channel x2 mode, with Pre EQ-A and Pre EQ-B pages. In addition
to numeric values, EQ settings are displayed graphically. Inactive parameters appear
shaded. Q, for example, is not active when, say, the HIGH band is set to H.SHELF.
The Pre EQ pages for each mode are shown below.
Note that the LOW band gain and HIGH band gain parameters can also be adjusted on
the Main 1 page (see page 52). Likewise, the HPF frequency parameter can also be
adjusted on the Main 2 page (see page 54). On these pages, however, the channels are
grouped.
1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Pre EQ page.
Use the ON/OFF button next to each EQ graph to turn on and off the Pre EQ for each
channel. Note that these buttons also turn on and off the LOW band and HIGH band
parameters on the Main 1 page.
2-ch mode
4-ch mode—Front 4-ch mode—Rear
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
58 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the G (gain), F (frequency), Q (width), or T
(Filter Type) parameter.
3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the
selected parameter.
The parameter ranges are as follows.
Note that when the HPF is set to THRU, the HPF parameter on the Main 2 page is inac-
tive.
Parameter HPF
LOW
1
1. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10) or low shelving EQ (L.SHELF).
MID
2
2. Peaking EQ.
HIGH
3
3. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), high shelving EQ (H.SHELF), or low pass filter (LPF).
Gain (G)
—–18 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB steps)
Frequency (F)
16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz (1/12 oct steps)
Q
— 10.0–0.10
Filter Type (T)
THRU
4
, HPF
4. The HPF is bypassed when set to THRU.
PEAKING,
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING,
H.SHELF, LPF,
THRU
5
5. The HIGH band is bypassed when set to THRU.
Post EQ 59
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Post EQ
The post-convolution EQ consists of a fully parametric 4-band EQ. Parameters can be
adjusted for each channel individually on the Post EQ page. In 4-channel mode, two
Post EQ pages are available: Post EQ Front and Post EQ Rear. Likewise, in 2-channel x2
mode, with Post EQ-A and Post EQ-B pages. In addition to numeric values, EQ settings
are displayed graphically. Inactive parameters appear shaded. Q, for example, is not
active when, say, the HIGH band is set to H.SHELF.
The Post EQ pages for each mode are shown below.
1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Post EQ page.
Use the ON/OFF button next to each EQ graph to turn on and off the Post EQ for each
channel.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the G (gain), F (frequency), Q (width) or T
(Filter Type) parameter.
2-ch mode
4-ch mode—Front 4-ch mode—Rear
2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B
60 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the
selected parameter.
The parameter ranges are as follows.
Parameter
LOW
1
1. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), low shelving EQ (L.SHELF), or high pass filter (HPF).
L-MID
2
2. Peaking EQ.
H-MID
3
3. Peaking EQ.
HIGH
4
4. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), high shelving EQ (H.SHELF), or low pass filter (LPF).
Gain (G)
–18 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB steps)
Frequency (F)
16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz (1/12 oct steps)
Q
10.0–0.10
Filter Type (T)
PEAKING,
L.SHELF, HPF,
THRU
5
5. The HPF and LPF are bypassed when set to THRU.
PEAKING PEAKING
PEAKING,
H.SHELF, LPF,
THRU
6
6. The HIGH band is bypassed when set to THRU.
Loading Impulse-Response Data 61
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Loading Impulse-Response Data
This section explains how to load impulse-response data for each channel of the current
program from the Internal Card, PC Card, CD-ROM drive. Impulse response data
stored in the following formats can be loaded: TM4 or TMC. See “File Types” on page
9 for more information. In the impulse-response file list, a dotted box highlights the
selected file. The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of write-protected files. In the
DRIVE section of the page, INTERNAL is the Internal Card, CD-ROM is the CD-ROM
drive, and PCMCIA is the PC Card.
The Data Load pages for each mode are shown below.
1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Rev page.
2 Select the DATA LOAD button, and then press [ENTER].
The Data Load page appears.
3 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to
make it the active drive.
The impulse-response data stored on the active drive appear in the file list.
4 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a file from
the list.
5 Use the cursor buttons to select the channel to which you want to load the
impulse-response data, and then press [ENTER].
A warning message appears. Select YES to load the selected file, or select NO to cancel
the operation.
The selected impulse-response data is loaded.
6 To return to the Rev page, select the BACK button, and then press [ENTER].
The Rev page appears.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
62 Chapter 5—Editing Programs
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Impulse-response data (TM4 format) created by using IRSampler, the
impulse-response sampling software, or IREdit, the impulse-response editing software,
can be loaded into the SREV1 from a PC Card. The RC-SREV1 looks for
impulse-response data stored in the “\yamaha\srev\data” folder of the PC Card, so you
need to make a new folder called “data” in “x:\yamaha\srev\” and then copy your
impulse-response data into it. (Note that “x” refers to the letter assigned to your PC
Card while it’s inserted in your PC.)
The 2-channel (SP2) and 4-channel (SP4) programs that you create are stored in the
“\yamaha\srev\prog” folder, and 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2 projects are
stored in the “\yamaha\srev\proj” folder. When you copy or move any of these files to
another PC Card by using your PC, be sure to use the same folder organization and
naming, otherwise, the SREV1 will not be able to find the files.
Note that the SREV1 can only list up to 128 files in a folder, so do not put any more files
than that into a folder. If you do have more than 128 files in a folder, the SREV1 lists the
first 128 files copied to the folder in alphabetical order.
Multiple SREV1s 63
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Multiple SREV1s
6
In this chapter...
About Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Multiple-unit Operating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
64 Chapter 6—Multiple SREV1s
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
About Multiple SREV1s
Up to four SREV1s can be controlled from a single RC-SREV1.
Connections
Multiple SREV1s are connected together in a daisy-chain
fashion using the SERIAL ports shown here. Connections
between units are made using serial cables, which are avail-
able from your Yamaha dealer.
Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1
The following example shows how up to four SREV1s can be connected together in a
daisy-chain fashion for control from an RC-SREV1. The SREV1 connected to the
RC-SREV1 is automatically assigned ID #1, and the other SREV1s are assigned IDs in
order of connection, as shown.
2 SERIAL 1
SREV1 #1
RC-SREV1
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
REMOTE
SREV1 #2
SREV1 #3
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
SREV1 #4
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
Serial cable
Serial cable
Serial cable
Remote cable
-1/DEC +1/INC
PARAMETER
CURSOR
ENTER
UTILITY
PROGRAM
BYPASS
PARAMETER
FINE
PARAMETER
MAIN
INPUT CLIP
OUTPUT CLIP
CH
1234
Multiple-unit Operating Notes 65
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Multiple-unit Operating Notes
• The RC-SREV1 should be connected to SREV1 #1.
• Connect the SREV1s together by using serial cables.
• Turn on the SREV1s first, and then the RC-SREV1.
• Do not connect or disconnect any serial cables while the system is up and running.
• Do not turn off any of the SREV1s while the system is up and running.
Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1
This section explains how to select the SREV1 to be controlled from the RC-SREV1.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Setup page shown below.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the SREV #1, SREV #2, SREV #3, or SREV #4
button in the CONNECT section of the page.
The button of the currently selected SREV1 appears highlighted. The buttons of uncon-
nected SREV1s appear shaded.
3 Press the [ENTER] button.
A confirmation message appears.
4 Select YES to continue, or select NO to cancel the operation.
5 Press the [ENTER] button.
The RC-SREV1 retrieves system information such as Reverb mode, and wordclock
source from the selected SREV1, and then updates its display. The number of the
selected SREV1 appears in the top-right corner of the display (see page 18).
MIDI 67
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
MIDI
7
In this chapter...
MIDI & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MIDI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the MIDI Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
68 Chapter 7—MIDI
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
MIDI & the SREV1
The SREV1 supports the following MIDI messages:
• Program Changes to recall up to 12 Quick memory programs
• Control Changes for Reverb Balance and Reverb Level control
These MIDI messages are not transmitted when actions are performed on RC-SREV1.
Quick memory programs can be assigned to MIDI Program Changes and then recalled
remotely from other MIDI equipment. When a Program Change message is received,
the program stored in the assigned Quick memory is recalled. See “Assigning Quick
Memory Programs to Program Changes” on page 70 for more information.
The Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters for each channel can be assigned to
MIDI Control Changes and then controlled remotely from other MIDI equipment.
When a Control Change message is received, the assigned parameter is controlled. See
“Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71 for more information.
The SREV1 can be set to receive Program Change and Control Change messages on any
MIDI Channel from 1 through 16, and in 2-channel x2 mode, individual MIDI Chan-
nels can be set for A and B. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69 for
more information.
MIDI Ports
The MIDI IN and OUT ports are used to transmit and
receive MIDI messages. The MIDI IN port receives
messages, while the MIDI OUT port currently echoes
the messages received at the MIDI IN port, essentially
like a MIDI THRU port.
Note: Do not control the SREV1 by using MIDI messages and the RC-SREV1 simulta-
neously.
OUT INMIDI
MIDI Pages 69
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Pages
MIDI settings are made on the MIDI pages shown below.
Setting the MIDI Receive Channels
The MIDI Channel used to receive MIDI Program Change and Control Change mes-
sages is set on the MIDI page. There are two MIDI Channel settings in 2-channel x2
mode, one for A and one for B.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the CH parameter in the MIDI RECEIVE CHAN-
NEL section of the page.
3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a MIDI Chan-
nel from 1 through 16 or OFF.
When OFF is selected, the SREV1 ignores received MIDI messages.
2-ch mode 4-ch mode
2-ch x2 mode
70 Chapter 7—MIDI
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program
Changes
Quick memory programs P01 through P06 (2-channel or 4-channel mode), P01–P12
(2-channel x2 mode) can be assigned to Program Changes 1 through 128.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. parameter in the PROGRAM
CHANGE TABLE section of the page.
3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to assign a Program
Change from 1 through 128 to the selected Quick memory program.
4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROGRAM NO. parameter in the PRO-
GRAM CHANGE TABLE section of the page.
5 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Quick mem-
ory program from P01 through P12, or “---” for no assignment.
Quick memory program number assignments P07 through P12 are active only in
2-channel x2 mode. In 2-channel and 4-channel mode, they are ignored.
When a Program Change message is received, the program stored in the assigned Quick
memory is recalled along with the necessary impulse-response data, and the program’s
number and title appear on the display, and the Edit indicator, if displayed, disappears.
The following illustration shows the type of MIDI equipment that can be used with the
SREV1 for remote Quick memory program recall using Program Change messages.
PHANTOM +48V
OFF
ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR
PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL
232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
–20+10 100 100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF
ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
SREV1
MIDI IN
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MIDI controller
MIDI keyboard
MIDI mixer
MIDI Sampler
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes 71
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes
Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters for each channel can be assigned to MIDI
Control Changes 0 through 95.
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV BALANCE or REV LEVEL assignments
in the CONTROL CHANGE section of the page.
In 2-channel mode, these are L-CH and R-CH. In 4-channel mode, Front-L, Front-R,
Rear-L, and Rear-R. And in 2-channel x2 mode, A-L, A-R, B-L, and B-R.
3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to assign a Control
Change to OFF or 0 through 95.
When a Control Change message is received, the assigned parameter is controlled. If the
Rev page is selected, you can see the parameter value update, and if the parameter is the
currently selected parameter, then the corresponding fader moves as well.
If a Control Change is assigned to more than one parameter, all the assigned parameters
are controlled when that Control Change is received.
Since Control Changes are assigned to channels individually, they are not affected by
the GROUP button on the Rev page. Even if channels are grouped, only the assigned
channel parameter is controlled when a Control Change message is received.
If a page selected by using the [PARAMETER FINE] button is displayed when a Control
Change message is received, the corresponding fader moves and the graph and param-
eter values change, causing the Edit status indicator to appear.
If a page selected by using the [PARAMETER MAIN] button is displayed when a Con-
trol Change message is received, the corresponding fader, graph, and parameter value
do not change. Only the Edit status indicator appears. To update the fader, graph, and
parameter value, select another page, then select the previous page again.
The following illustration shows the type of MIDI equipment that can be used with the
SREV1 for remote parameter control using Control Change messages.
PHANTOM +48V
OFF
ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR
PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL
232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
–20+10 100 100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF
ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
SREV1
MIDI IN
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MIDI controller
MIDI keyboard
MIDI mixer
MIDI Sampler
Wordclocks 73
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Wordclocks
8
In this chapter...
Wordclocks & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Wordclock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting the Wordclock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Wordclock Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
74 Chapter 8—Wordclocks
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Wordclocks & the SREV1
Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when
digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another, otherwise, signals may
not be received correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchroniza-
tion is achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchronizing
all the digital audio signals in a system. Note that wordclocks are not the same as
SMPTE/EBU timecode or MIDI timecode, which are typically used to synchronize tape
machines, MIDI sequencers, and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the syn-
chronization of the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device.
In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, and the
other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master.
Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables, typically BNC cables, or
derived from digital audio connections, such as AES/EBU.
If you’re connecting to the SREV1 using only analog inputs and outputs, no special
wordclock settings are required, and the SREV1 can be set to use its own internally gen-
erated wordclock. If you’re connecting other equipment digitally, however, you must
decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves.
The SREV1 can be used as a 48 kHz wordclock master, or slaved to an external word-
clock source of 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. It can receive an external wordclock signal via an
AES/EBU input, SLOT input, or the BNC WORD CLOCK IN connector.
In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices
be turned on even if they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master first, and
then the slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves first, and then the
master. Before use, make sure that the wordclock slaves are correctly locked to the
wordclock master. Most devices have front panel indicators, similar to the FS LOCK
indicators on the SREV1, to show when they are wordclock locked. Refer to the relevant
owner’s manuals for more information.
When the wordclock source is changed, lower the volume of your system just in case a
device becomes unlocked and outputs any unpleasant noises.
Wordclock Connections
The WORD CLOCK IN BNC connector is used to
receive wordclock signals from other digital audio
equipment. When the wordclock source is set to
WCLK IN, the SREV1 locks to the wordclock sig-
nal received at the WORD CLOCK IN connector.
See “Wordclock Hookup Examples” on page 78 for
more information.
The WORD CLOCK IN is auto-terminating.
WORD CLOCK IN
An external wordclock can
also be sourced from an
AES/EBU input or the slot
input of a digital I/O card.
Selecting the Wordclock Source 75
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Selecting the Wordclock Source
1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the DIO page shown below.
2 Use the cursor buttons to select a source.
The button for the currently selected source appears highlighted.
The following wordclock sources can be selected.
This button indicates that a wordclock signal is present and that it’s at the
same frequency as the currently selected source. This source can be selected.
This button indicates that although a wordclock signal is present, it’s not at
the same frequency as the currently selected source. This source can be
selected.
This button indicates that no wordclock signal is present.
This source cannot
be selected.
The button of the selected source appears highlighted, as shown here.
Note: When the wordclock source is changed on the wordclock master device, noise may
occur from the SREV1’s outputs, especially if an MY8-AT I/O card is installed, so turn
down your power amps beforehand, otherwise any connected speakers may be damaged.
Condition Source Description
Always available INT 48K
Internal 48 kHz wordclock (default setting)
When lockable
external wordclock
present
WCLK IN
External wordclock via the BNC WORD CLOCK IN
AES/EBU1
External wordclock via the AES/EBU IN 1
AES/EBU2
External wordclock via the AES/EBU IN 2
AES/EBU I/O card
installed (MY8-AE)
& lockable
wordclock present
SLOT x 1/2
External wordclock via slot x, input pair 1/2
SLOT x 3/4
External wordclock via slot x, input pair 3/4
SLOT x 5/6
External wordclock via slot x, input pair 5/6
SLOT x 7/8
External wordclock via slot x, input pair 7/8
ADAT or Tascam I/O
card installed
(MY8-AT, MY8-TD)
& lockable
wordclock present
SLOT x
External wordclock via slot x
76 Chapter 8—Wordclocks
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
3 Press the [ENTER] button to activate the selected source.
The SREV1 checks the selected source to see if a usable wordclock signal is available. If
such a signal exists, the SREV1 locks to it and the corresponding FS LOCK indicator,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, lights up.
If a usable wordclock signal is not found, the SREV1 will not operate and the FS LOCK
indicators flash, as shown in the following table. In this situation, you must select
another wordclock source or correct the external wordclock source. This condition also
occurs if a previously selected external wordclock source is disconnected, the device
supplying it is turned off, or the external wordclock is neither 48 kHz nor 44.1 kHz.
The following table shows the indicator status when the SREV1 is synced and locked to
its internal wordclock or an external source.
The following table outlines each step in the transition from wordclock unlock to lock.
If the external wordclock frequency is neither 44.1 kHz nor 48 kHz (for example, it’s
32 kHz), the transition from unlock to lock will stop at step 2 and the SREV1 outputs
will remain muted.
Condition
Wordclock Source
Button
FS LOCK Indicators
RC-SREV1
FS Status Indicator
Internal wordclock
Lock = yes
Sync = yes
External wordclock
Lock = yes
Sync = yes
Step Condition
Wordclock
Source
Button
FS LOCK
Indicators
RC-SREV1
FS Status
Indicator
Notes
1
Lock = no
Sync = no
Flashing together
External source not con-
nected, etc., SREV1
muted
2
Lock = yes
Sync = no
Alternate flashing
About 0.5–1 second
after external source
connected, SREV1
locked, but still muted
3
Lock = yes
Sync = no
After about 0.5–1 sec-
ond, the wordclock fre-
quency is established
and the SREV1 unmuted
4
Lock = yes
Sync = yes
After about 2–3 seconds,
synchronization is estab-
lished and the SREV1 is
ready for use
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
Selecting the Wordclock Source 77
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
The following table outlines each step in the transition from wordclock lock to unlock.
The INT 48K and WCLK IN buttons do not indicate whether or not the wordclock is
locked or synchronized and never appear with diagonal lines through them. You can
check the lock status of these sources by using the SREV1’s FS LOCK indicator, or the
RC-SREV1’s FS status indicator.
If a previously selected wordclock source is no longer available, for example, when an
I/O card is removed, the wordclock source button appears shaded. In this case, select
another wordclock source in order to use the SREV1.
Step Condition
Wordclock
Source
Button
FS LOCK
Indicators
RC-SREV1
FS Status
Indicator
Notes
1
Lock = yes
Sync = yes
Normal condition
2
Lock = no
Sync = no
Flashing together
External source discon-
nected, etc., SREV1
muted
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
78 Chapter 8—Wordclocks
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Wordclock Hookup Examples
The following diagram shows the three different ways in which an external wordclock
can be fed to the SREV1: AES/EBU input, slot input, or WORD CLOCK IN.
SREV1
1
2
3
00 00 00 00
YAMAHA D24
OVER
READY
0
2
6
1012
1420
1830
20
42
2660
–dB
OVER
ABS H
LOCK
TIME DISPLAY
CAPTURE ABS/REL
REMAIN
VARI
SPEED
UTILITY
SETUP
PROJECT
SELECT
LOC MEM
RECALL
LOC MEM
STORE
LOCATEENTERCANCEL
0/-
1
4
7
8
R
7654321
RECORD
READY
SOLO/
SELECT
MONITOR SELECT
PEAK
HOLD
AUTO
INPUT
ALL
INPUT
FORMAT CHASE
L
2
5
8
3
6
9
UNDO/
REDO
EDIT
JOG ON
JOG/DATA SHUTTLE/
CURSOR
PROJECT SEARCH
RTN TO
ZERO
REW FF
STOP PLAY REC
ROLL
BACK
LAST REC
SET
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
REPEAT
REHE
PHONES
LEVEL
010
ON
POWER
OFF
PHONES
BA
B
A
AUTO
PUNCH
IN
OUT
INT
24
48K
MASTER
WC
BIT
FS
TC
MSF
READY
0
2
6
12
20
30
42
60
–dB
V. TRACK
SELECT
SREV1
AES/EBU
DIGITAL I/O CARD
MODEL MY8-AE
SREV1
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
WORD CLOCK IN
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
IN
2
3
1
12
2
3
1
SLOT
1
DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE
WC source setting: AES/EBU 1
Wordclock Master
Digital Mixer
Wordclock source
Digital Multitrack Recorder
WC source setting: SLOT1 1/2
WC source setting: WCLK IN
Wordclock Hookup Examples 79
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
The following diagram shows how a wordclock signal can be distributed by using coax-
ial BNC cables in a multiple-SREV1 system.
SREV1 #1
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
SREV1 #2
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
SREV1 #3
SERIAL 1
SERIAL 2
SREV1 #4
WORD CLOCK IN
WORD CLOCK IN
WORD CLOCK IN
WORD CLOCK IN
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
MEMORY CARD
CD-ROM
POWER
ON OFF
INPUT OUTPUT
CLIP
SIGNAL
12 123CH434
48K
44.1K
FS LOCK
Serial cable
Serial cable
Serial cable
Wordclock Master
WC source setting: WCLK IN
WC source setting: WCLK IN
WC source setting: WCLK IN
WC source setting: WCLK IN
I/O Options 81
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
I/O Options
9
In this chapter...
I/O Options & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Available I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Choosing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
82 Chapter 9—I/O Options
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
I/O Options & the SREV1
In addition to the two AES/EBU inputs and outputs, the SREV1 features two mini
YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots for use with optional I/O cards,
which offer several analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular dig-
ital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam.
The Yamaha AW4416 Audio Workstation, 01V Digital Mixing Console, D24 Digital
Multitrack Recorder, DME32 Digital Mixing Engine, AD824 AD Converter, and DA824
DA Converter also use mini YGDAI I/O cards. Note that the “CD” series of YGDAI cards
used by the Yamaha 02R Digital Recording Console and 03D Digital Mixing Console
are not interchangeable with mini YGDAI cards.
Slot inputs can be freely assigned to SREV1 channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page
35 for more information. Channel-to-slot output assignments are fixed. See “Output
Assignments” on page 9 for more information.
Available I/O Cards
The following mini YGDAI cards are currently available. See the Yamaha Professional
Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on mini YGDAI cards:
<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>.
MY8-AD: 8 Analog Inputs
The MY8-AD card provides eight electronically balanced analog inputs via phone jack
connectors, with 20-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters.
MY4-AD: 4 Analog Inputs
The MY4-AD card provides four electronically balanced analog inputs via female XLR
connectors, with 24-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters.
MY4-DA: 4 Analog Outputs
The MY4-DA card provides four electronically balanced analog outputs via male XLR
connectors, with 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters.
MY8-AT: ADAT
The MY8-AT card provides ADAT format digital I/O via two MultiChannel Optical
Digital Interface connectors, and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths.
MY8-AE: AES/EBU
The MY8-AE card provides AES/EBU format digital I/O via a 25-pin D-sub connector,
and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths.
MY8-TD: Tascam
The MY8-TD card provides Tascam format digital I/O via a 25-pin D-sub connector,
and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths. A BNC connector is provided for word-
clock output.
MY8-TD cards feature a device selector switch (EXT: 88/INT: 38) that should be set to
match the device being connected. This should be set to “EXT: 88” when connecting a
Tascam DA-88, or “INT: 38” when connecting a Tascam DA-38 or other digital audio
device.
Choosing I/O Cards 83
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Specifications for the currently available I/O cards are as follows.
As these specifications show, analog I/O cards offer either inputs or outputs, while dig-
ital I/O cards offer both inputs and outputs.
When an I/O card not listed above, for example, a future addition to the mini YGDAI
series, is installed, the message “UNKNOWN CARD” appears.
Choosing I/O Cards
For analog I/O with XLR-type connectors, an MY4-AD card could be installed in, say,
SLOT 1, and an MY4-DA card in SLOT 2, although it makes no difference which card
is installed in each slot.
To connect the SREV1 to other digital audio equipment, you must determine which
digital interconnect format—AES/EBU, ADAT, or Tascam—the other equipment sup-
ports, and then install the necessary I/O cards.
The following table shows which cards to use when connecting the SREV1 to other
Yamaha digital audio products. Each product can be connected by using the AES/EBU,
ADAT, or Tascam interface format.
An external wordclock can be sourced via digital I/O cards. See “Selecting the Word-
clock Source” on page 75 for more information.
Using ADAT I/O cards in certain devices can cause wordclock-lock problems, so it’s rec-
ommend that you source wordclock signals via I/O cards of another format.
See your Yamaha dealer for more information.
Card Format In Out A/D D/A Wordlength Connectors
MY8-AD Analog input 8 —
20-bit,
128 times
——Phone jack (balanced) x8
MY4-AD Analog input 4 —
24-bit,
128 times
——XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4
MY4-DA Analog output — 4 —
20-bit,
128 times
— XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4
MY8-AT ADAT 8 8 ——16, 20, 24 Optical x2
MY8-AE AES/EBU 8 8 ——16, 20, 24
25-pin D-sub
(cable not included)
MY8-TD Tascam 8 8 ——16, 20, 24
25-pin D-sub
BNC wordclock output
Unit
Max. # of
Cards
Format Card for Other Unit
Card for
SREV1
AW4416
2
ADAT MY8-AT MY8-AT
Tascam MY8-TD MY8-TD
AES/EBU MY8-AE MY8-AE
AD824
1 As above
DA824
1 As above
DME32
4 As above
D24
4 As above
01V
1 As above
02R
4 single or
2 double
ADAT CD8-AT MY8-AT
Tascam CD8-TDII MY8-TD
AES/EBU CD8-AE or CD8-AE-S MY8-AE
03D
1 As above
84 Chapter 9—I/O Options
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Installing I/O Cards
This section explains how to install mini YGDAI cards in the SREV1.
1 Turn off the SREV1.
2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.
Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,
as shown below. You may have to push firmly to plug the card into the SREV1
connector.
4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Do not leave the thumb-
screws loose, as the card will not be grounded correctly.
You can check the type of I/O card installed in each slot, and assign slot inputs to chan-
nels on the DIO page. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information.
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK INREMOTE
2
OUT INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
IN
OUT
3
12
2
3
1
121
2
2
3
1
3
12
AC IN
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
WORD CLOCK IN
REMOTE
2
OUT
INMIDI
SERIAL 1
DIGITAL
(
AES/EBU
)
IN
OUT
3
12
2
3
1
1
2
12
2
3
1
3
12
Troubleshooting 85
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Symptom Advice
Cannot turn on the
SREV1.
Make sure that the power cord is connected properly to a suitable AC wall outlet
and the SREV1. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 for more informa-
tion.
Make sure that the SREV1 POWER switch is set to ON. See “Turning On & Off the
SREV1” on page 26 for more information.
If you still cannot turn on the SREV1, contact your Yamaha dealer.
The POWER indicator
lights up when the SREV1
is turned on, but the
INPUT and OUTPUT
indicators flash
alternately.
Contact your Yamaha dealer.
Cannot turn on the
RC-SREV1.
Make sure that the remote cable is connected between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1
properly. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” on page 22.
Make sure that the RC-SREV1 POWER switch is in the ON position. See “Turning
On & Off the RC-SREV1” on page 26 for more information.
The FS LOCK indicators
flash alternately.
The SREV1 is locked but not synchronized to the external wordclock source. See
“Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information.
The FS LOCK indicators
flash together.
The SREV1 is neither locked nor synchronized to the external wordclock source.
See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information.
The FS status section of
the RC-SREV1 display
shows “UNLOCK”.
The SREV1 is neither locked nor synchronized to the external wordclock source.
See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information.
Connected an input
signal but there’s no
output.
If you’re using slot inputs, make sure the I/O cards are installed properly and
secured using the thumbscrews. See “Installing I/O Cards” on page 84.
Make sure the input is assigned to the proper channel. See “Assigning Inputs” on
page 35 for more information.
Use the level meters to help trace the signal. See “Metering” on page 37 for
more information.
Check the channel’s input and output level settings. See “Setting Input & Output
Levels” on page 36 for more information.
Is the Bypass mode is set to REV-MUTE, the reverb balance set to 100%, and the
reverb level set to –∞?
Are you connected to the correct outputs? See “Output Assignments” on page 9
for more information.
Can’t hear any reverb.
Is the SREV1 bypassed. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more informa-
tion.
Make sure that the Reverb Balance parameter is not set to 0%. See “Main 2
Parameters” on page 54 and “Fine Reverb Parameters” on page 56 for more
information.
Make sure that the Reverb Level parameter is not set to 0 dB. See “Fine Reverb
Parameters” on page 56 for more information.
Recalled a program but
only its title is displayed,
no program number.
Probably because the program was recalled from a drive. Program numbers
(P01–P12) are displayed only when programs are recalled from the Quick memo-
ries. See “RC-SREV1 Display” on page 18 for more information.
86 Troubleshooting
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Cannot store a Quick
memory program.
Is the selected Quick memory write-protected? See “Protecting Quick Memory
Programs” on page 44 for more information.
Cannot list the programs,
projects, or impulse
response data files on a
PC Card.
Make sure the PC Card is fully inserted. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for
more information.
Cannot list the programs,
projects, or impulse
response data files on a
CD-ROM.
Make sure the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28
for more information.
A program is being
recalled unknowingly.
Is the program assigned to a MIDI Program Change and being recalled by exter-
nal MIDI messages? See “Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program
Changes” on page 70.
A parameter is being
adjusted unknowingly.
Is the parameter assigned to a MIDI Control Change and responding to external
MIDI messages? See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71.
Cannot receive MIDI
messages.
Check the MIDI connections.
Make sure the connected MIDI device is turned on and set to transmit on the
correct MIDI Channels.
Check the MIDI settings on the RC-SREV1. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Chan-
nels” on page 69.
MIDI Program Change
messages do not recall
programs.
Make sure that the SREV1 is set to receive Program Change messages on the cor-
rect channel. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69.
Check that the Program Change being transmitted is assigned to a Quick mem-
ory program. See “Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes” on
page 70.
MIDI Control Change
messages do not control
parameters.
Make sure that the SREV1 is set to receive Control Change messages on the cor-
rect channel. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69.
Check that the Control Change being transmitted is assigned to a parameter. See
“Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71.
Several parameters are
adjusted when a Control
Change message is
received.
If a Control Change is assigned to more than one parameter, all of those parame-
ters are adjusted when that Control Change is received. See “Assigning Parame-
ters to Control Changes” on page 71 for more information.
Noise occurs from the
outputs when the
wordclock is changed on
the wordclock master
device.
This is normal, although it’s more likely to occur if an MY8-AT I/O card is
installed. To eliminate the risk of speaker damage, turn down your power amps
beforehand.
Cannot eject a CD-ROM.
Use the emergency disc eject hole. See “SREV1 Front Panel” on page 12 for more
information.
Symptom Advice
Error Messages 87
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Appendix
Error Messages
Message Reason Solution
VERSION MISMATCH.
PUSH ANY KEY TO
DOWNLOAD.
The software versions of the SREV1 and
RC-SREV1 do not match.
Press any button to download the necessary
software from the SREV1 to the RC-SREV1 in
order to match the software versions.
COMMUNICATION
TIMEOUT.
Communication with the SREV1 failed.
Turn off both the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 and
check the remote cable connections, also
check for breaks in the cable.
WRITE PROTECTED.
A write protected Quick memory, pro-
gram, or project was selected.
Turn off the protection in order to store or
edit the title. The CD-ROM is always write
protected.
INSERT MEDIA. No media inserted.
Insert the necessary media. Note that it
takes the SREV1 between 20 and 30 sec-
onds to recognize CD-ROMs.
TITLE IS EMPTY! No title has been entered or only spaces. Enter some characters for the title.
!!! LOW BATTERY !!!
The SREV1’s internal backup battery is
getting low.
Ask your Yamaha dealer to change the bat-
tery as soon as possible.
!!! NO BATTERY !!!
RESTORED FROM
BACKUP.
The SREV1’s internal backup battery is
flat and the contents of the bat-
tery-backed memory were lost. The con-
tents were restored from the backup file
on the Internal card.
Ask your Yamaha dealer to change the bat-
tery as soon as possible.
DATA FILE NOT
FOUND! INSERT
PCMCIA CARD.
When the SREV1 was restarted, the
Reverb mode changed, or a project
loaded, the programs were loaded from
the PC Card but the necessary
impulse-response data could not be
found.
Insert the PC Card containing the necessary
impulse-response data.
DATA FILE NOT
FOUND! INSERT
CD-ROM DISC.
When the SREV1 was restarted, the
Reverb mode changed, or a project
loaded, the programs were loaded from
the CD-ROM but the necessary
impulse-response data could not be
found.
Insert the CD-ROM containing the neces-
sary impulse-response data.
EMPTY DATA! SOME
DATA ISN’T LOADED.
CAN’T SAVE THIS
PROGRAM.
The impulse-response data for the pro-
gram was not loaded.
Load the necessary impulse-response data,
or load the program again.
NO SUFFICIENT
SPACE! CAN’T SAVE
THIS PROGRAM.
The program cannot be stored due to
lack of space on the PC Card or Internal
card.
Insert another PC Card, or delete some
unnecessary programs in order to free some
space.
DESTINATION WRITE
PROTECTED!
You tried to edit the title of a program or
project on the Library page, but the des-
tination file is write protected.
Use another title, or turn off the write pro-
tection.
COULD NOT
COMMUNICATE
WITH SREV1. CHECK
THE CABLE
CONNECTION AND
SREV1’S POWER,
THEN TURN ON
RC-SREV1 AGAIN.
Communication between the SREV1 and
RC-SREV1 failed during startup.
If the RC-SREV1 is powered by an optional
AC adapter, make sure that the SREV1 is
turned on.
Turn off both the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 and
check the remote cable connections, also
check for breaks in the cable.
88 Appendix
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Confirmation Messages
Message Condition Solution
CURRENT IS EDITED.
RECALL PROGRAM OK?
Appears when you recall a program from
the Quick memory page, but the current
program contains unsaved changes.
To discard the current program’s
unsaved changes and recall the pro-
gram, press OK. To cancel the operation,
press CANCEL.
CURRENT IS EDITED,
LOAD LIBRARY OK?
Appears when you recall a program from
the Library page, but the current pro-
gram contains unsaved changes.
To discard the current program’s
unsaved changes and load the program,
press OK. To cancel the operation, press
CANCEL.
SAME LIBRARY EXISTS!
OVERWRITE OK?
Appears when you save the current pro-
gram on the Library page, but a pro-
gram with the same title already exists.
To save and overwrite the existing pro-
gram, press OK. To cancel the operation,
press CANCEL.
Appears when you edit the title of the
selected program on the Library page,
but a program with the same title
already exists.
To overwrite the existing program, press
OK. To cancel the operation, press CAN-
CEL.
DELETE LIBRARY OK?
Appears when you delete the selected
program on the Library page.
Press OK to delete the selected program.
To cancel the operation, press CANCEL.
CURRENT IS EDITED.
LOAD PROJECT OK?
Appears when you recall a project from
the Project page, but the current pro-
gram contains unsaved changes.
To discard the current program’s
unsaved changes and load the project,
press OK. To cancel the operation, press
CANCEL.
SAME PROJECT EXISTS!
OVERWRITE OK?
Appears when you save a project on the
Project page, but a program with the
same title already exists.
To save and overwrite the existing pro-
gram, press OK. To cancel the operation,
press CANCEL.
Appears when you edit the title of the
selected project on the Project page, but
a program with the same title already
exists.
To save and overwrite the existing pro-
gram, press OK. To cancel the operation,
press CANCEL.
DELETE PROJECT OK?
Appears when you delete the selected
project on the Project page.
Press OK to delete the selected program.
To cancel the operation, press CANCEL.
LOAD DATA OK?
Appears when you load the selected
impulse-response data from the Data
Load page.
Press OK to load the selected
impulse-response data. To cancel the
operation, press CANCEL.
CHANGE REV MODE OK?
Appears when you select a different
Reverb mode on the Setup page.
Press OK to switch to the Reverb mode.
To cancel the operation, press CANCEL.
General Messages 89
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
General Messages
Message Meaning
INITIALIZING... The RC-SREV1’s internal information is being updated.
SETTING REV MODE... The Reverb mode is being changed.
RECALLING PROGRAM... A Quick memory program is being recalled on the Program page.
STORING PROGRAM... The current program is being stored to the selected Quick memory.
LOADING LIBRARY... The selected program is being loaded on the Library page.
SAVING LIBRARY... The current program is being saved on the Library page.
CHANGING TITLE... The title of the selected program is being changed on the Library page.
DELETING LIBRARY... The selected program is being deleted on the Library page.
CHANGING PROTECT MODE...
The protection setting of the selected program is being changed on the
Library page.
DOWNLOADING FILE LIST...
The program list is being downloaded from the selected drive on the Library
page.
LOADING DATA... The selected impulse-response data is being loaded on the Data Load page.
DOWNLOADING FILE LIST...
The impulse-response data list is being downloaded from the selected drive
on the Library page.
LOADING PROJECT... The selected project is being loaded on the Project page.
SAVING PROJECT... The selected project is being saved on the Project page.
CHANGING TITLE... The title of the selected project is being changed on the Project page.
DELETING PROJECT... The selected project is being deleted on the Project page.
CHANGING PROTECT MODE...
The protection setting of the selected project is being changed on the
Project page.
DOWNLOADING FILE LIST...
The project list is being downloaded from the selected drive on the Project
page.
90 Appendix
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
General Specifications
Sampling
rate
Internal 48 kHz
External 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Internal processing 32 bit
Program
Memories
2-channel, 4-channel
mode
6 (P01–P06)
2-channel x2 mode 12 (P01–P12)
Indicators
INPUT SIGNAL x4 (–34 dB), CLIP x4
OUTPUT SIGNAL x4 (–34 dB), CLIP x4
FS LOCK 48K, 44.1K
Others POWER, PC Card, CD-ROM
PC Card slot PCMCIA (Type II), PC Card ATA spec, FAT16
CD-ROM drive ISO9660 Level 2 format
Cooling fan x2
Power requirements
U.S.A. & Canada 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Europe 230 V AC, 50 Hz
Power consumption 120 W
Dimensions (W
×
H
×
D) 480 × 141.7 × 451.8 mm (18.9 x 5.6 x 17.8 inches)
Weight 11.5 kg (25.3 lbs)
Free-air operating temperature 5˚ C to 40˚ C (41˚ F to 104˚ F)
Power cord length 2.5 m
Supplied accessories
Power cord, CD-ROM (Reverb programs, data), Owner’s
Manual
Options
RC-SREV1, DB-SREV1, MY8-AD, MY4-AD, MY4-DA,
MY8-AT, MY8-AE, MY8-TD
Digital Input Specifications 91
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Digital Input Specifications
Digital Output Specifications
Control I/O Specifications
Remote Cable Wiring Diagram
Note that if the resistance of the +12V or GND line between the two connectors is more
than 1.5Ω, the optional Yamaha PA-6 AC adapter should be used to power the
RC-SREV1.
Note also that the screws used to secure the D-sub connectors to the SREV1 and
RC-SREV1 must be metric. Readily available D-sub connectors typically come with
securing screws with an imperial thread, which cannot be used. The securing screws on
the D-sub connectors on the supplied remote cable are metric.
Connection Format Data Length Level Connector
DIGITAL IN 1, 2 AES/EBU 24 bit RS-422
XLR-3-31 type
1
1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).
Connection Format Data Length Level Connector
DIGITAL OUT 1, 2
AES/EBU
1
1. Channel status:
Type: 2 audio channels.
Sampling rate: depends on internal configuration.
24 bit RS-422
XLR-3-32 type
2
2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).
Connection Format Level Connector
SERIAL 1, 2 — RS-422 8-pin mini DIN
MIDI IN MIDI — 5-pin DIN
MIDI OUT MIDI — 5-pin DIN
WORD CLOCK IN — TTL 75Ω BNC
REMOTE
—
RS-422 9-pin D-sub (female)
SLOT (x2) mini YGDAI ——
SREV1 RC-SREV1
NC 1 1 NC
RX– 2 2 TX–
TX+ 3 3 RX+
NC 4 4 NC
+12V 5 5 +12V
NC 6 6 NC
RX+ 7 7 TX+
TX– 8 8 RX–
GND 9 9 GND
9-pin D-sub
(male)
9-pin D-sub
(female)
92 Appendix
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Dimensions
Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice.
For European Model
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 70A
Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4
480
132
141.7
9.7
31881 81
437
21.5 21.5
43.5 34362.5
440 11.8
451.8
Units: mm
Glossary 93
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Glossary
2-channel mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as a stereo processor.
4-channel mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as a 4-channel surround pro-
cessor.
2-channel x2 mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo
processors (A and B).
ADAT interconnect format—The digital audio interconnect format typically
found on ADAT-compatible digital audio equipment. Eight channels of digital audio
are carried per fiber-optic connection using Toslink connectors.
AES/EBU interconnect format—The digital audio interconnect format, estab-
lished by the AES (Audio Engineering Society) and EBU (European Broadcasting
Union), for transferring digital audio data between professional digital audio equipment.
Two channels of digital audio (left/odd and right/even) are carried per balanced line.
CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read Only Memory)— The compact disc format for
data storage. Defined in the Yellow Book.
Control Change—A type of MIDI message offering real-time parameter control.
Typical Control Changes include Modulation, Volume, Pan, and Portamento.
Convolution—The digital audio process of imposing the characteristics of one signal
onto another signal. The SREV1 convolves an acoustic “fingerprint” of a previously
measured environment onto an audio signal, faithfully recreating the original reverber-
ation, with accurate reflection detail identical to that produced had the sound been
heard in that environment.
Convolution time—Convolution time is not the same as reverb time. Reverb time is
the time it takes the reverberation to decay by –60 dB, and more convolution is required
to provide reverberation down to –90 dB or –120 dB, so the convolution time must be
between 1.5 and 2 times more than the reverb time.
DIO—Abbreviation for “digital input and output.”
Drives—Programs, projects, and impulse-response data can be stored on the follow-
ing drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. (The Internal Card is compact flash
memory.)
FAT16—The FAT (File Allocation Table) system, developed by Microsoft and sup-
ported by MS-DOS and most Windows operating systems, is essentially a database that
records where files are stored on hard disks and other storage media. FAT12 is the orig-
inal 12-bit version. FAT16 is the 16-bit version, since superseded by the 32-bit version,
FAT32, which supports larger storage devices.
FS—Abbreviation for “sampling frequency.”
Impulse response—The sound pressure measured at a sensor position set against
the time of an acoustic pulse “fired” from the source position. In other words, an envi-
ronment’s acoustical response.
Initial delay—The delay before the reverb reflections start.
ISO9660 Level 2—A standard format for storing files and directories on a CD-ROM.
Conforming discs can be read by Macintosh, Windows, UNIX, and other systems.
Library—The place used to load, save, title, protect, and delete programs from the
Internal Card, PC Card, and CD-ROM.
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface)—The standard digital interface
for controlling electronic musical systems and audio equipment.
94 Glossary
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface)—The second-gener-
ation YGDAI interface system used on the 01V Digital Mixing Console, D24 Digital
Multitrack Recorder, DME32 Digital Mixing Engine, and SREV1.
PC Card—A small, credit card-sized device for use with personal computers and other
electronic devices. PC Cards come in three thicknesses, the thinnest being Type I, which
is typically used for RAM or ROM memory. Type II cards, which are slightly thicker,
may contain, for example, a fax/modem, while Type III cards are thick enough to con-
tain a hard disk drive.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Associa-
tion)—The organization responsible for the development of the PC Card standard.
Peaking—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost a band of frequencies, producing
a mountain-peak type response. The width of the band is called the Q. Middle-band
EQ is usually of the peaking type. Compare with Shelving.
PEQ—Abbreviation for “parametric EQ.”
Program—Measured impulse response data is combined with variable parameters
such as reverb time and initial delay to form reverb programs. Preset programs are sup-
plied on CD-ROM. User programs can be stored in the Quick memories, Internal Card
or PC Card.
Program Change—A type of MIDI message for recalling programs.
Project—A Project contains all the Quick memory programs and the current pro-
gram settings. Projects can be stored on the Internal Card or PC Card.
Q—The unit used to express a filter’s width. High values imply a narrow frequency
band, low values, a wide frequency band.
Quick memory—Quick memories are special memories for storing programs.
Unlike programs stored on the Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM, which take time
to load, Quick memory programs can be recalled instantly.
Reverb mode—The SREV1 offers three modes of operation: 2-channel, 4-channel,
and 2-channel x2. In 2-channel mode, the SREV1 functions as a stereo processor. In
4-channel mode, the SREV1 offers 4-channel surround processing. In 2-channel x2
mode, the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo processors (A and B).
Reverb time—The time it takes the reverberation to decay by –60 dB. See also Con-
volution time.
RS-232C—An interface for connecting serial devices, offering a transmission distance
of approximately 15 meters, typically using 9- or 25-pin D-Sub connectors.
RS-422—A balanced interface for connecting serial devices, offering a transmission
distance of approximately 1 kilometer, higher data rates, and greater immunity to inter-
ference than RS-232C.
Shelving—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost frequencies above or below a set
frequency. It produces a shelf-looking response curve. High and low EQs are usually of
the shelving type. Contrast with Peaking.
Tascam TDIF-1 interconnect format—The Tascam Digital InterFace audio inter-
connect format typically found on Tascam TDIF-1-compatible digital audio equip-
ment. TDIF-1 is a bidirectional, 8-channel format, which uses 25-pin D-sub connectors.
Wordclock—A clock signal used to synchronize the data processing circuits of devices
digital audio equipment.
YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface)—Yamaha digital audio
interface system offering a range of analog and digital input and output options for
Yamaha digital audio equipment, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam DIO.
Index 95
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Index
Symbols
–1/DEC button 17
+1/INC button 17
Numerics
2CH
file types 9
2-channel mode
analog hookup example 24
convolution time 6
definition 93
digital hookup example 23
file types 9
I/O configurations 6
output assignments 9
selecting 34
2-channel x2 mode
analog hookup example 25
convolution time 6
definition 93
digital hookup example 23
file types 9
I/O configurations 6
output assignments 9
selecting 34
2X2
file types 9
4CH
file types 9
4-channel mode
analog hookup example 25
convolution time 6
definition 93
digital hookup example 23
file types 9
I/O configurations 6
output assignments 9
selecting 34
A
AC adapter
cable clip 20
using 27
AC IN connector
about 14
using 26
Activity indicator
CD-ROM 13
PC Card 12
ADAT format
definition 93
I/O cards 82
AES/EBU format
definition 93
I/O cards 82
AES/EBU IN
assigning 35
hookup examples 23
AES/EBU OUT
channel assignments 9
hookup examples 23
AIFF
file types 9
Air inlet 12
Analog hookup examples 24
Analog I/O 82
Arrow buttons 17
Assigning
inputs 35
parameters to Control Changes
71
quick memory programs to
Program Changes 70
ATA card, see PC Card
B
Block diagram 10
BRIGHT control
about 20
using 27
Brightness, RC-SREV1 display 27
Bypass
mode setting 40
status 18
using 40
BYPASS button & indicator
about 16
using 40
C
Cable clip 20
Caps lock
Cautions ii
CD-ROM
definition 93
drive 13
Emergency disc eject hole 13
handling iii
loading impulse-response data
61
loading programs 45
loading projects 48
operation diagram 8
using 28
CLIP indicator
RC-SREV1 17
SREV1 12
CompactFlash 29
Configurations, I/O 6
Connecting
external wordclock 74
hookup examples 23
MIDI 68
multiple SREV1s 64
power cord 26
RC-SREV1 22
Connection examples 23
CONT control
about 20
using 27
Contrast, RC-SREV1 display 27
Control Changes
assigning parameters 71
definition 93
Convolution
available times 6
definition 93
Cooling fans 14
Cursor buttons 17
D
Data load page 61
DATA wheel 17
DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board 6
DC 12V IN
connector 20
using 27
DEC button 17
Deleting
library programs 47
projects 50
Dial, PARAMETER wheel 17
DIGITAL (AES/EBU) IN 14
DIGITAL (AES/EBU) OUT 14
Digital hookup examples 23
DIO page 75
Direct-out, bypass mode 40
Display
about 18
brightness 27
contrast 27
Drives
about 8
definition 93
loading programs 45
loading projects 48
operation diagram 8
saving programs 46
saving projects 49
E
Edit buffer
operation diagram 8
Edit status indicator 18
96 Index
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Editing
fine post EQ parameters 59
fine pre EQ parameters 57
fine reverb parameters 56
library program titles 46
Main 1 parameters 52
Main 2 parameters 54
programs 51
project titles 49
quick memory program titles 43
Eject button
CD-ROM 13
PC Card 12
Ejecting
CD-ROM 28
PC Card 29
Emergency disc eject hole 13
ENTER button 17
EQ
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
Extensions, SREV1 files 9
External wordclock 75
F
Fader status 19
FAT16
definition 93
PC Cards 29
Files types 9
Fine parameters
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
reverb 56
Frequency
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
wordclock 75
Front panel 12
FS LOCK indicators 12
FS status 18
FS, definition 93
G
Gain
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
Getting started 21
Grounding screw 14
H
H.shelf
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
High
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
High EQ
fine editing 57
Main 1, grouped 52
High-mid EQ 59
Home page on the web iv
Hookup examples
analog & digital I/O 23
multiple SREV1s 64
wordclock 78
HPF
Main 2, grouped 54
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
I
I/O cards
about 82
available 82
choosing 83
hookup example 24
installing 84
specifications 83
wordclock source 75
Impulse-response data
about 6
definition 93
loading 61
INC button 17
Indicators
BYPASS 16
CD-ROM activity 13
FS LOCK 12
INPUT 12
INPUT CLIP 17
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT CLIP 17
PC Card activity 12
POWER 12
Initial delay
fine editing 56
Main 1, grouped 52
INPUT CLIP indicator
RC-SREV1 17
SREV1 12
Input level
fine setting 36
Main 1, grouped 54
Input/output configurations 6
Inputs
assigning 35
DIGITAL AES/EBU IN 14
I/O cards 82
setting levels 36
Inserting
CD-ROM 28
PC Card 29
Installing I/O cards 84
Internal Card
loading impulse-response data
61
loading programs 45
loading projects 48
operation diagram 8
saving programs 46
saving projects 49
Internal wordclock 75
Internet web site iv
ISO9660
CD-ROM 28
definition 93
L
L.shelf
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
LCD brightness & contrast 27
Levels, setting 36
Library
about 8
deleting library programs 47
editing library program titles 46
loading programs 45
operation diagram 8
protecting programs 47
saving programs 46
saving projects 49
working with 45
Library page 45
Loading
impulse-response data 61
programs from the library 45
projects 48
Lock, wordclock 75
Low
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
Low EQ
fine editing 57
Main 1, grouped 52
Lowercase, titling
Low-mid EQ 59
LPF
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
M
Main 1
page 52
parameter editing 52
Main 2
page 54
parameter editing 54
Index 97
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Main page area 18
Mains lead 26
MEMORY CARD slot
about 12
using 29
Memory Stick 29
Meter I/O page 36, 38, 39, 40
Meter mode, setting 39
Meters
about 18
mode setting 39
peak hold 39
using 37
Microdrive 29
MIDI
about 68
assigning parameters to Control
Changes 71
assigning quick memory
programs to Program
Changes 70
definition 93
implementation chart 99
IN & OUT ports, about 15
MIDI IN port 68
MIDI OUT port 68
receive channels 69
MIDI page 69
mini YGDAI
card specifications 83
cards 82
definition 94
Modes, see Reverb modes
Motorized faders 17
Multiple SREV1s
about 64
hookup examples 64
operating notes 65
selecting 65
serial connectors 64
MY cards 82
N
Naming, see titling
O
OUTPUT CLIP indicator
RC-SREV1 17
SREV1 12
Output level
fine setting 36
Main 2, grouped 54
Outputs
assignments 9
DIGITAL AES/EBU OUT 14
I/O cards 82
setting levels 36
Owner’s manual
about v
conventions used v
P
PA-6, optional AC adapter 27
Page tabs 18
Page title 18
PARAMETER FINE button 16
PARAMETER MAIN button 16
Parameters 9
PC Card
definition 94
handling iii
loading impulse-response data
61
loading programs 45
loading projects 48
operation diagram 8
saving programs 46
saving projects 49
using 29
PCMCIA
definition 94
See also PC Card
Peak hold, using 39
Peaking
definition 94
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
PEQ, definition 94
Ports
MIDI 15
REMOTE 15
SERIAL 15
Post EQ 59
Post EQ page 59
Power cord 26
POWER switch (RC-SREV1)
about 20
using 26
POWER switch (SREV1)
about 12
using 26
Powering up the RC-SREV1 26
Powering up the SREV1 26
Pre EQ 57
Pre EQ page 57
PROGRAM button 16
Program Changes
assigning quick memory
programs 70
definition 94
Program number & title 18
Program page 42
Programs
about 7
assigning Program Changes 70
definition 94
deleting library programs 47
editing 51
editing library program titles 46
editing quick memory program
titles 43
loading from the library 45
parameters 9
protecting library programs 47
protecting quick memory
programs 44
recalling from quick memories
42
saving in the library 46
storing in quick memories 43
Project page 48
Projects
about 7
deleting 50
editing project titles 49
loading 48
protecting projects 50
saving 49
working with 48
Protecting
library programs 47
projects 50
quick memory programs 44
Q
Q
definition 94
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
Quick memories
about 7
assigning Program Changes 70
definition 94
recalling programs 42
storing programs 43
working with 42
R
RC-SREV1
connecting 22
control surface 16
display 18
optional AC adapter 27
rear panel 20
selecting SREV1s 65
turning on and off 26
Rear panel
RC-SREV1 20
SREV1 14
98 Index
SREV1—Owner’s Manual
Recalling, quick memories 42
Receive channels, MIDI 69
Remote controller, see RC-SREV1
REMOTE port
connecting 22
RC-SREV1 20
SREV1 15
Rev page 56
Reverb balance
assigning Control Changes 71
fine editing 56
Main 1, grouped 54
Reverb level
assigning Control Changes 71
fine editing 56
Reverb modes
about 6
convolution times 6
definition 94
display 18
selecting 34
Reverb time 6
fine editing 56
Main 1, grouped 52
Rev-mute, bypass mode 40
Routing inputs, see Assigning inputs
RS-422
definition 94
SERIAL ports 64
S
Saving
programs in the library 46
projects 49
Selected SREV1 18
Selecting
inputs 35
reverb modes 34
SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 65
wordclock source 75
SERIAL ports
about 15
Setting
bypass mode 40
input & output levels 36
meter mode 39
MIDI receive channels 69
Setup page 34, 65
Shelving, definition 94
SIGNAL indicator 12
Slots
assigning inputs 35
card options 82
card specifications 83
choosing cards 83
installing I/O cards 84
output assignments 9
SmartMedia 29
SP2
file types 9
SP4
file types 9
Specifications
I/O cards 83
SREV1
block diagram 10
bypassing 40
features 4
front panel 12
in a nutshell 2
installation v
rear panel 14
turning on and off 26
Startup
internal operations 33
RC-SREV1 32
SREV1 32
Storing, quick memories 43
Switching on the RC-SREV1 26
Switching on the SREV1 26
Sync, wordclock 75
System examples 23
System parameters 9
T
Tabs 18
Tascam TDIF-1 format
definition 94
I/O cards 82
Termination, wordclock 74
Thru
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
Title edit dialog box 41
Titling
edit dialog box 41
editing library program titles 46
editing project titles 49
editing quick memory program
titles 43
TM4
file types 9
TMC
file types 9
Troubleshooting 85
Turning on the RC-SREV1 26
Turning on the SREV1 26
Type
post EQ 59
pre EQ 57
U
Unlock, wordclock 75
Unsync, wordclock 75
Uppercase, titling
UTILITY button 16
V
Vent 12
W
Warnings i
WAV
file types 9
Web site iv
Wheel, PARAMETER 17
WORD CLOCK IN
about 15
using 74
Wordclocks
about 74
definition 94
hookup examples 78
selecting 75
WORD CLOCK IN 74
Y
Yamaha web site iv
YGDAI
card specifications 83
cards 82
definition 94
YAMAHA [Sampling Reverberator] Date: 1 Oct 2000
Model: SREV1
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
OMNI OFF/OMNI ON
X
X
Memorized
Note
Number True Voice
X
**************
X
X
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
X
X
X
X
After
Touch
Keys
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
Pitch bend X X
Control
Change
0–95 X O Assignable
Prog
Change :True#
X
**************
X
X
Assignable
System Exclusive X X Parameter Change
System
Common
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
X
X
Aux
Messages
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
YAMAHA CORPORATION
V652000 R1 1 IP 112 Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan
01 08 150 AP Printed in Japan
Documenttranscriptie
SAMPLING REVERBERATOR Owner’s Manual POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON MEMORY CARD OFF CD-ROM Keep This Manual For Future Reference. E FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC (U.K.) LTD. ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. Laser Diode Properties * Material : GaAlAs * Wavelength : 765–815nm * Emission Duration : Continuous * Laser Output Power : Less than 0.22mW (Note) Laser output is measured at a distance of 20cm from the object lens on the optical pick-up head. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This unit is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label is located on the rear panel. Klassmärkning för Finland. CAUTION USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. ATTENTION TOUTE MANIPULATION DES COMMANDES, TOUT RÉGLAGE OU TOUTE UTILISATION AUTRES QUE CEUX SPÉCIFIÉS DANS CE MANUEL POURRAIENT ENTRAÎNER UNE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AUX RADIATIONS. VORSICHT DIE VERWENDUNG DER BEDIENELEMENTE UND EINSTELLFUNKTIONEN BZW. DAS AUSFÜHREN VON HANDLUNGEN IN EINER NICHT AUSDRÜCKLICH IN DIESER ANLEITUNG ERWAHNTEN WEISE KÖNNEN ZU EINER GESUNDHEITSSCHADLICHEN BESTRAHLUNG FÜHREN. PRECAUCIÓN EL USO DE CONTROLES, AJUSTES O LA APLICACIÓN DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DISTINTOS A LOS DESCRITOS EN ESTE MANUAL, PUEDE OCASIONAR UNA EXPOSICIÓN A RADIACIÓN PELIGROSA. Important Information i Important Information Read the following before using the SREV1 Warnings • Do not subject the unit to extreme temperatures, humidity, direct sunlight, or dust, which could be a potential fire or electrical shock hazard. • Do not allow water to enter the unit or allow it to get wet. Fire or electrical shock may result. • Connect the power cord or AC adapter only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard. • Hold the power-cord plug or AC adapter when disconnecting from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A power cord damaged through pulling is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard. • Do not touch the power plug or AC adapter with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard. • Do not place heavy objects, including the unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet. • Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard. • Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. • If the power cord is damaged (e.g., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. • Do not plug several pieces of equipment into the same AC outlet. This may overload the AC outlet, and could be a fire or electrical shock hazard. It may also affect the performance of some equipment. • If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord or AC adapter from the AC outlet and consult your dealer for repair. Using a unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard. • Do not place small objects on top of the unit. Metal objects falling inside is a fire and electrical shock hazard. • If a foreign object or water gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord or AC adapter from the AC outlet and consult your dealer for repair. Using a unit in this condition is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard. • If the unit is dropped or the cabinet damaged, turn off the power, remove the power plug or AC adapter from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result. • Do not remove the unit covers. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer. • Do not attempt to modify the unit. This is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard. SREV1—Owner’s Manual ii Important Information • Do not block the front panel air inlet, ventilation slots, or fan outlets. Doing so is a potential fire hazard. Cautions • Allow enough free space around the SREV1 for normal ventilation. This should be 20 cm behind, 10 cm at the sides, and 30 cm above. These distances should also be adopted when rack-mounting the SREV1. If the SREV1 is mounted in a portable rack case, keep the rear of the case open when using the SREV1 so as not to obstruct the flow of air from the two cooling fans. If the airflow is not adequate, the SREV1 will heat up inside and may cause a fire. Do not mount the SREV1 above equipment that produces a lot of heat, such as a power amplifier. • Turn off all audio equipment when connecting to the unit, and use only cables of the type specified in this Owner’s Manual. • If you plan not to use the unit for a long period of time, remove the power cord or AC adapter from the AC outlet. Leaving the unit connected is a potential fire hazard. • Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the unit. Use only a soft, dry cloth. • If the unit is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a warmer environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form inside the unit, which may affect performance. In this case, the unit should be allowed to acclimatize for about one hour before use. • When the wordclock is changed on the wordclock master device, noise may occur from the SREV1’s outputs, especially if an MY8-AT I/O card is installed, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise any connected speakers may be damaged. • If the RC-SREV1 displays the message “LOW BATTERY” when you turn on the unit, ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the internal battery as soon as possible. The unit will still work, but data other than backed up data will be lost. We recommend that you save this data to a PC Card before replacing the battery. • For electrical safety reasons, it’s important that the SREV1 is grounded properly. The supplied power cord has a three-pin plug, and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the SREV1 will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, however, a ground connection should be made to the dedicated grounding screw. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Important Information iii Handling CD-ROMs • Use only discs of the type specified in this Owner’s Manual. • The CD-ROM drive is for use with data discs only. Never insert audio CDs. • Store discs in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt. • Always store discs in their cases. • When handling discs, be careful not to touch the surface. Hold discs by the edge. Fingerprints, smudges, scratches, or dirt can affect performance. • Be careful not to scratch the labeled side of the disc. Even scratches on that side can affect performance. • Fingerprints and dust should be removed by wiping gently from the center of the disc towards the disc edge, using a soft, dry cloth. Never wipe in a circular motion and never rub a disc hard with a dry cloth. • For stubborn stains and dirt, use a cleaning kit designed specifically for use with CDs. Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth. • For disc marking, use only pens specifically designed for writing on CDs and write only on the designated area. Do not attach a label to a disc. • If a disc is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a warmer environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form on the disc surface, which may affect performance. In this case, the disc should be allowed to acclimatize for about one hour before use. • Do not under any circumstances attempt to use discs that are cracked or warped. Doing so may seriously damage the unit. Handling PC Cards • Use only PC Cards of the type specified in this Owner’s Manual. • Some PC Cards and PC Card adapters cannot be used with the SREV1. • Do not eject a PC Card while the activity indicator is lit. Doing so may cause data lose. • Store PC Cards in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt. • Always store PC Cards in their cases. Precautions for Transportation During transportation, keep the CD-ROM door shut with tape, or a pad, or the like. • When using tape, use tape that adheres well to the front panel. • When using a pad, use a pad stiff enough that the elasticity holds the tray in place. Front panel Pad Tape CD-ROM door SREV1—Owner’s Manual iv Important Information Interference The SREV1 uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected equipment. SREV1 Exclusion of Certain Responsibility Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the SREV1. Package Contents The SREV1 package contains the following items: • SREV1 Sampling Reverberator • CD-ROM containing preset reverb programs and SREV1 utilities • Power cord • This Owner’s Manual Contact your Yamaha dealer if something is missing. Optional Extras • RC-SREV1 Remote Controller • DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and MMX is a trademark of Intel Corporation. PCMCIA is a registered trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. Copyright No part of the SREV1, its software, including the supplied impulse-response data, or this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation. Using the supplied impulse-response data with equipment other than the SREV1, or obtaining the data by sampling or any other means, is strictly prohibited. © 2000 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved. Yamaha Web Site Information about the SREV1, related products, and other Yamaha professional audio equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at: <http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Important Information v About this Manual This Owner’s Manual covers both the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator and the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller. (The SREV1 software manuals are on the CD-ROM.) All the information you need in order to operate the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator and the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller is contained in this manual. Use the table of contents to familiarize yourself with its organization and locate topics, and use the index to locate specific information. A glossary of SREV1-related jargon is provided on page 93. Installing the SREV1 When mounting the SREV1 in a rack, remove its feet and leave adequate ventilation space all around (at least 20 cm of free space behind). If the SREV1 is mounted in a portable rack case, keep the rear of the case open when using the SREV1 so as not to obstruct the flow of air from the two cooling fans. Do not mount the SREV1 above equipment that produces a lot of heat, such as a power amplifier. Conventions Used in this Manual In this manual, the SREV1 Sampling Reverberator, the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller, and the SREV1 software are referred to as the “SREV1,” “RC-SREV1,” and “SREV1 software” respectively. The RC-SREV1 features two types of button: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER and UTILITY) and buttons that appear on the RC-SREV1 display pages. References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets, such as “press the [ENTER] button.” References to page buttons are not emphasized, for example, select the WCLK IN button. Generally there are three versions of each RC-SREV1 display page, one for each mode: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. If relevant to the task being explained, all three pages are shown. If the item being discussed is the same regardless of which mode is selected, then only one page is shown. “PC” refers to an IBM PC-compatible computer running a Windows operating system. SREV1—Owner’s Manual vi Important Information NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS ● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. ● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. ● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 ● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel: 030-2828425 ● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. ● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. SREV1—Owner’s Manual vii Contents Contents 1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Welcome to the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The SREV1 in a Nutshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SREV1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SREV1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SREV1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2 Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SREV1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning On & Off the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 22 22 23 26 26 26 27 27 28 29 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Internal Operations at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Reverb Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input & Output Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Meter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypassing the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Title Edit dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Quick Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 12 14 16 18 20 32 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 40 41 42 45 48 Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Main 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fine Reverb Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Impulse-Response Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 54 56 57 59 61 SREV1—Owner’s Manual viii Contents 6 Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 About Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-unit Operating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 MIDI & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the MIDI Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 68 68 69 69 70 71 Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Wordclocks & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wordclock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Wordclock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wordclock Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 64 64 64 65 65 74 74 75 78 I/O Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 I/O Options & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 82 83 84 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 88 89 90 91 91 91 91 92 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 MIDI Implementation Chart SREV1—Owner’s Manual Welcome 1 Welcome 1 In this chapter... Welcome to the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The SREV1 in a Nutshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SREV1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SREV1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SREV1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 2 Chapter 1—Welcome Welcome to the SREV1 Thank you for choosing the Yamaha SREV1 Sampling Reverberator. Unlike conventional digital reverberators, which synthesize reverberation using contrived signal-processing algorithms, the new SREV1 Sampling Reverberator from Yamaha employs digital convolution processing to impose an acoustic “fingerprint” of a previously measured environment onto any audio signal, faithfully recreating the original reverberation, with accurate reflection detail identical to that produced had the sound been heard in that environment. The SREV1 is perfect for recording studios, audio post, broadcast, concert halls, theaters, or anyone looking for superb quality reverb that sounds just like the real thing, with the option to sample the reverberation characteristics of any location for use back in the studio. The SREV1 in a Nutshell Sonic “fingerprints” are produced by measuring the impulse response (i.e., acoustic characteristics) of an environment, which involves “blasting out” time-stretched pulses through an accurate speaker system and recording the results via carefully placed microphones. The resultant impulse-response data can then be used by the SREV1 to convolve the captured acoustic characteristics onto any audio signal. Sampling on location Convolution processing POWER Firing time-stretched pulses INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON L 20 POWER TEMP PROTECTION POWER ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD CLIP R L 15 20 25 LEVEL 6 3 40 L 0 15 20 25 10 30 OFF 10 30 6 3 40 –dB R 0 CLIP R 15 20 25 LEVEL 6 3 40 L 0 15 25 10 30 10 30 6 3 40 –dB R 0 Impulse-response data PC ATA CARD FL FR RL RR FLASH CARD POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON MEMORY CARD OFF CD-ROM In addition to stereo reverb (2-channel mode), the SREV1 offers four-channel processing for surround reverb (4-channel mode). Alternatively, the SREV1 can be configured as two fully independent reverberators (2-channel x2 mode), each with its own inputs, outputs, and program settings. Thirty-two of Yamaha’s new convolution chips provide the necessary “horsepower” for real-time convolution of up to 5.46 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 2.73 seconds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode). Featuring an additional 32 convolution chips, the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board doubles the available convolution time to a maximum of 10.92 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 5.46 seconds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode). Measured impulse response data is combined with variable parameters such as reverb time and initial delay to form reverb programs, which can be stored in special Quick SREV1—Owner’s Manual The SREV1 in a Nutshell 3 memories or the Internal Card or PC Card. Up to six programs can be stored in Quick memory in 2-channel or 4-channel mode; 12 in 2-channel x2 mode. Programs in Quick memory can be recalled instantly via the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller or MIDI Program Changes. Projects, which contain all the Quick memory programs and the current program settings, provide a convenient way to manage programs and settings for each job. Projects can be stored on the Internal Card or PC Card. The PC Card slot is fully compatible with the PC Card ATA specification and supports the FAT16 file system. The CD-ROM drive supports the ISO9660 Level 2 format. Both the PC Card and CD-ROM format is compatible with Windows. The supplied CD-ROM contains preset reverb programs of famous venues from around the world, and a CD-ROM library is planned for future release. The preset programs on the supplied CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory. Program editing is handled at two levels: Main parameters and Fine parameters. With Main parameter editing, channel parameters, such as reverb time, initial delay, reverb balance, EQ, etc., are grouped, so that, for example, the reverb time of all channels can be set simultaneously. Fine parameter editing adds pre-convolution 4-band PEQ, post-convolution 4-band PEQ, and impulse-response data loading. Reverb parameters can be edited individually or grouped. Reverb balance and reverb level parameters for each channel can be controlled individually via MIDI Control Changes. Two AES/EBU inputs and outputs (providing 4 channels) are built in and two mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots offer various analog and digital I/O options (AES/EBU, ADAT, Tascam). Inputs can be assigned to channels individually, allowing various input/output configurations. In 2-channel mode, for example, a single input can be assigned to both channels (left and right) for mono in/stereo out operation, or an individual input can be assigned to each channel for true stereo in/stereo out operation. Superb sonic performance is provided by Yamaha’s new convolution chip, 24-bit I/O, 32-bit internal signal processing, and 48 kHz internal wordclock. External wordclocks of 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz are supported and can be sourced via the dedicated BNC wordclock input, AES/EBU inputs, or card slot inputs. Up to four SREV1s can be controlled using the optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller, which features a large 320 x 240 dot graphical display, with fluorescent backlight and adjustable brightness and contrast, four motorized faders for parameter editing, and input and output clip indicators. Power is supplied by the SREV1. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 4 Chapter 1—Welcome SREV1 Features Sonic Performance • 32 Yamaha convolution chips • 24-bit I/O and 32-bit internal processing • 48 kHz internal wordclock • 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz external wordclock Reverb Modes & Convolution Times • 2-channel (stereo), 4-channel (surround), and 2-channel x2 (A and B) reverb modes • Maximum convolution time of 5.46 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 2.73 seconds per channel (4-channel mode or 2-channel x2 mode) • Featuring an additional 32 convolution chips, the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board doubles the available convolution time to a maximum of 10.92 seconds per channel (2-channel mode), 5.46 seconds per channel (4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode) Programs & Projects • Programs combine impulse-response data with variable parameters such as reverb time, initial delay, EQ, and more • Quick memories hold six instantly recallable programs (2-channel or 4-channel mode); 12 programs (2-channel x2 mode) • Quick memory programs can be recalled via MIDI • Projects provide a convenient way to manage programs for each job • Programs and projects can be saved on the Internal Card or PC Card Storage • PC Card slot fully compatible with the PC Card ATA specification and supports the FAT16 file system • CD-ROM drive supports ISO9660 Level 2 format • PC Card and CD-ROM formats compatible with Windows Editing • Basic editing includes reverb time, initial delay, and reverb balance • Advanced editing includes basic parameters plus pre-convolution 4-band PEQ, post-convolution 4-band PEQ, and impulse-response data loading for each channel • Reverb balance and level parameters can be controlled via MIDI SREV1—Owner’s Manual SREV1 Features 5 Flexible I/O • Two AES/EBU format inputs and outputs (providing 4 channels) • Two mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots • Optional mini YGDAI cards offer a variety of analog and digital I/O configurations, with support for all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam Optional RC-SREV1 Remote Controller • Control up to four SREV1s • Large 320 x 240 dot display, with fluorescent backlight and adjustable brightness and contrast • Four motorized faders, data wheel, and INC/DEC buttons for parameter editing • Input and output signal clip indicators • Power supplied by the SREV1 (DC IN connector for use with optional AC adapter and custom remote cables) Others • Yamaha CD-ROM library of famous venues from around the world • SERIAL ports for multiple-unit operation • MIDI IN and OUT ports • BNC wordclock input • 3U rack space SREV1—Owner’s Manual 6 Chapter 1—Welcome SREV1 Basics Reverb Modes The SREV1 offers three Reverb modes: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. In 2-channel mode, the SREV1 functions as a stereo reverb processor. Use this mode if all you require is stereo outputs, as it offers the maximum convolution time per channel. In 4-channel mode, the SREV1 offers 4-channel processing for surround reverb. In 2-channel x2 mode, the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo reverb processors (A and B). See page 34 for information on selecting Reverb modes. The onboard AES/EBU inputs and mini YGDAI slot inputs can be freely assigned to channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. Convolution Times The following table shows the maximum convolution time available per channel for each mode with and without the optional DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board installed. Maximum Convolution Time per Channel (Fs = 48 kHz) Mode Base System with DSP Expansion Board (DB-SREV1) 2-channel 5.46 sec 10.92 sec 4-channel 2.73 sec 5.46 sec 2-channel x2 2.73 sec 5.46 sec Convolution time is not the same as reverb time. Reverb time is the time it takes the reverb to decay to –60 dB, and more convolution is required to provide reverberation to –90 dB or –120 dB, so the convolution time must be between 1.5 and 2 times more than the reverb time. Impulse-Response Data Impulse-response data contains the impulse-response information (i.e., acoustic characteristics) of a measured environment. Preset programs come with their own impulse-response data. Each channel of a program is assigned impulse-response data, as shown below, and data can be loaded for channels individually on the Data Load pages. See “Loading Impulse-Response Data” on page 61 for more information. The impulse-response data for the preset programs is loaded into the Internal Card at the factory. It’s also on the supplied CD-ROM. 2-channel mode 4-channel mode Left Front-left A-left Right Front-right A-right Rear-left B-left Rear-right B-right 2-channel program 4-channel program SREV1—Owner’s Manual 2-channel x2 mode 2-channel program x2 SREV1 Basics 7 Programs There are two types of reverb program: 2-channel and 4-channel. Two-channel programs are for use with 2-channel mode and 2-channel x2 mode, while 4-channel programs are for use only with 4-channel mode. In 2-channel mode, 4-channel programs do not appear in the program lists and vice versa. The preset programs on the supplied CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory. User programs can be stored in the Quick memories, Internal Card or PC Card, where they can be write-protected. Projects Projects contain all the Quick memory programs and the current program settings and free you to leave a project and come back to it at any time. Projects can be saved to the Internal Card or PC Card, where they can be write-protected. There are three types of project: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. Each project type is available only when the corresponding mode is selected. You can’t, for example, select a 2-channel project in 4-channel mode. Projects are managed on the Project pages. See “Working with Projects” on page 48 for more information. Quick Memories Quick memories are special memories for storing programs. Unlike programs on the Internal Card, PC Cards, and CD-ROMs, which take time to load, Quick memory programs can be recalled instantly. There are six Quick memories available in 2-channel or 4-channel mode; 12 in 2-channel x2 mode. Quick memories are managed on the Program pages. See “Working with Quick Memories” on page 42 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 8 Chapter 1—Welcome Drives Programs, projects, and impulse-response data can be loaded from the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. The number of programs that can be stored on each drive depends on its capacity and the size of the associated impulse-response data. Programs and drives are managed on the Library pages. See “Working with the Library” on page 45 for more information. The following diagram shows how programs and projects can be transferred to and from the drives and Quick memories, and impulse-response data transferred from the drives. Drives Internal Card PC Card CD-ROM PC ATA CARD FLASH CARD Impulse-response data Project P01 Current program P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 Quick memories See the Program pages for Quick memory store/recall operations See the Library pages for program and drive save/load operations See the Project pages for project and drive save/load operations See the Data Load pages for impulse-response data loading SREV1—Owner’s Manual SREV1 Basics 9 File Types The SREV1 uses several file extensions to identify file types. Although these extensions do not generally appear on the RC-SREV1 pages, they may come in useful when checking the contents of a PC Card or CD-ROM on your PC. File Extension File Type TM4 Impulse-response data (Yamaha original format) TMC Compressed and encrypted impulse-response data (Yamaha original format) SP2 2-channel program SP4 4-channel program 2CH 2-channel mode project 4CH 4-channel mode project 2X2 2-channel x2 mode project Parameters SREV1 program parameters, such as reverb time, initial delay, an EQ, are stored within each program. Saved parameters include: reverb time, initial delay, reverb balance, reverb level, pre EQ, post EQ, and impulse-response data names. Other parameters, including reverb mode, wordclock source, I/O select, I/O level, and MIDI settings, are not stored within each program, but they are stored in the SREV1’s battery-backed memory. Output Assignments The following table shows the fixed output assignments for each mode. Outputs Mode Channel AES1 AES2 1 2-channel Left 4-channel 1 • • 2-channel x2 B-left B-right • • • • Rear-right A-right • • • Rear-left SLOT2 • • Front-right A-left SLOT1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 • Right Front-left 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • SREV1—Owner’s Manual SREV1—Owner’s Manual SLOT 2 SLOT 1 AES/EBU IN 2 AES/EBU IN 1 Input Select Initial Delay Pre EQ Convolution As above (Rear-right, B-right) As above (Rear-left, B-left) As above (Right, Front-right, A-right) Input Level Input Meter (Left, Front-left, A-left) Post EQ Off Bypass (Rev Mute) On Reverb Balance Reverb Level Off Bypass (Direct Out) On Output Level Output Meter SLOT 2 SLOT 1 AES/EBU OUT 2 AES/EBU OUT 1 10 Chapter 1—Welcome SREV1 Block Diagram Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 11 Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 2 In this chapter... SREV1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 14 16 18 20 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 12 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 SREV1 Front Panel 1 2 3 4 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON CD-ROM MEMORY CARD 5 OFF 67 8 9 J K A Air Inlet The two internal cooling fans draw air into the SREV1 through this inlet. If the airflow is restricted, the SREV1 may overheat, so make sure that it’s not blocked. B INPUT and OUTPUT signal indicators The INPUT and OUTPUT signal level indicators consist of SIGNAL and CLIP indicators for each channel. The SIGNAL indicators light up when a signal is 34 dB below clipping and are intended to show the presence of a signal, while the CLIP indicators light up when a signal is actually clipping. See “Metering” on page 37 for more information. C FS LOCK indicators These indicators show the sampling rate—48 kHz or 44.1 kHz—and whether or not the SREV1 is locked to the selected wordclock source. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. D POWER switch & indicator This switch is used to turn on the power to the SREV1. The POWER indicator lights up when the SREV1 is turned on. See “Turning On & Off the SREV1” on page 26 for more information. E MEMORY CARD slot PC Cards can be inserted here for loading and saving programs, projects, or impulse-response data. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more information. F Memory card eject button This button is used to eject PC Cards. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more information. G Memory card activity indicator This indicator lights up when the inserted PC Card is being written or read. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual SREV1 Front Panel 13 H CD-ROM drive The supplied CD-ROM, containing reverb programs, projects, and impulse-response data, can be inserted here. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information. I Disc activity indicator This indicator lights up when the inserted CD-ROM is being read. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information. J CD-ROM eject button This button is used to eject CD-ROMs. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information. K Emergency disc eject hole This hole is used to manually eject CD-ROMs that cannot be ejected in the normal way. Use a pin-like tool of 2 mm or less in diameter, insert it into the hole and push gently. (A straightened paper clip makes an ideal tool.) Note that this technique should only be used as a last resort. Frequent use may lead to malfunction. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 14 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 SREV1 Rear Panel 1 2 1 SLOT 1 SLOT 2 OUT 2 1 2 MIDI 1 IN 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN 9 J AC IN 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 OUT 3 4 DIGITAL (AES/EBU) 5 1 3 IN 6 7 8 A Cooling fan outlets The two cooling fans expel air out through these outlets. If the airflow is restricted, the SREV1 may overheat, so make sure these outlets are not blocked. B SLOTs 1 & 2 These two slots are for use with optional mini YGDAI cards, offering a variety of analog and digital I/O options. See “I/O Options” on page 81 for more information. Slot inputs can be freely assigned to channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. C AC IN connector This connector is used to connect the SREV1 to a suitable AC outlet by using the supplied power cord. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 for more information. D Grounding screw For safety reasons, it’s important that the SREV1 is grounded properly. The supplied power cord has a three-pin plug, and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the SREV1 will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, however, a ground connection should be made to this grounding screw. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other noise. E DIGITAL OUT (AES/EBU) connectors These two XLR-3-32-type connectors (AES1 and AES2) transmit up to four output signals, two per connection, as AES/EBU format digital audio. Output to channel assignments are fixed. See “Output Assignments” on page 9 for more information. Use only dedicated AES/EBU connecting cables (110Ω). F DIGITAL IN (AES/EBU) connectors These two XLR-3-31-type connectors (AES1 and AES2) receive up to four input signals, two per connection, as AES/EBU format digital audio. AES/EBU inputs can be freely assigned to channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. Use only dedicated AES/EBU connecting cables (110Ω). SREV1—Owner’s Manual SREV1 Rear Panel 15 G MIDI IN & OUT ports These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports and are used to connect the SREV1 to other MIDI equipment for remote operation using MIDI Program Change and Control Change messages. See “MIDI & the SREV1” on page 68 for more information. H SERIAL 1 & 2 ports These 8-pin mini DIN connectors are used to connect up to four SREV1s in a multiple-unit system. See “Multiple SREV1s” on page 63 for more information. I REMOTE port This 9-pin D-sub connector is used to connect the RC-SREV1. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” on page 22 for more information. J WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector can be used to receive an external wordclock signal. See “Wordclock Connections” on page 74 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 16 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 RC-SREV1 Control Surface INPUT CLIP CH 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP 1 -1/DEC BYPASS 2 8 9 +1/INC PARAMETER J PROGRAM 3 K PARAMETER MAIN 4 PARAMETER FINE 5 CURSOR UTILITY L 6 ENTER M 7 A Display See “RC-SREV1 Display” on page 18 for more information. B BYPASS button & indicator This button is used to bypass the SREV1. The BYPASS indicator lights up when the SREV1 is bypassed. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more information. C PROGRAM button This button selects the Program, Library, and Project pages. D PARAMETER MAIN button This button selects the Main 1 and Main 2 pages. E PARAMETER FINE button This button selects the Rev, Pre EQ, and Post EQ pages. F UTILITY button This button selects the Setup, DIO, Meter I/O, and MIDI pages. SREV1—Owner’s Manual RC-SREV1 Control Surface 17 G Motorized faders These four 60-mm motorized faders are for adjusting parameter values and input and output levels. H INPUT CLIP indicators There are four INPUT CLIP indicators, one for each channel, which light up when the corresponding channel’s input signal is clipping. I OUTPUT CLIP indicators There are four OUTPUT CLIP indicators, one for each channel, which light up when the corresponding channel’s output signal is clipping. J –1/DEC & +1/INC buttons These buttons work in parallel with the DATA wheel and are used for selecting programs or projects and setting parameter values. Use the [–1/DEC] button to decrease a value; the [+1/INC] button to increase it. K DATA wheel This wheel is used for selecting programs or projects and setting parameter values. Turn it clockwise to increase a value; counterclockwise to decrease it. L Cursor buttons ( / / / ) These buttons are used to maneuver the cursor around the display pages in order to select buttons and parameters. The left ( ) button moves the cursor to the left; the right ( ) button moves it to the right; the up ( ) button moves it up; the down ( ) button moves it down. M ENTER button This button is used to execute functions and set options and parameters. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 18 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 RC-SREV1 Display This large 320 x 240 dot display, with fluorescent backlight and adjustable brightness and contrast controls, displays the various program, parameter, and utility pages, system status, and signal level meters. As well as showing parameter values numerically, reverb and EQ parameters are displayed graphically, so you can see settings at a glance. Bypass status FS status Page title Program number & title Selected SREV1 Reverb mode Edit status Page tabs Main page area Meters Page title—This is the title of the currently selected page. Program number & title—This is the number and title of the current program. In 2-channel x2 mode, two numbers and titles are displayed, one for program A, the other for program B. Program numbers appear only when programs are recalled or stored in Quick memory. They do not appear when programs are loaded from a drive (i.e., Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM). Page tabs—Pages are grouped as program, parameter main, parameter fine, and utility, and these tabs show the titles of the pages available in each group. Main page area—The various program, parameter, and utility pages appear here. Bypass status—The status of the Bypass function appears here: ON (SREV1 bypassed) or OFF. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more information. FS status—The SREV1 sampling rate is displayed here—48 kHz or 44.1 kHz—and whether or not it’s locked to the selected wordclock source—LOCK or UNLOCK. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. Selected SREV1—This is the SREV1 currently selected for control from the RC-SREV1. See “Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1” on page 65 for more information. Reverb mode—This is the current Reverb mode: 2CH, 4CH, or 2CHX2. Edit status—The Edit status indicator shows whether or not the current reverb program has been edited since is was recalled. If it has, the word “EDIT” appears (the letter “E” appears in 2-channel x2 mode). Meters—In 2-channel mode, input and output meters for the left and right channels are displayed here. In 4-channel mode, meters for the front-left, front-right, rear-left, and rear-right channels are displayed. In 2-channel x2 mode, meters for the A-left, A-right, B-left, and B-right channels are displayed. For the 4-channel and 2-channel x2 modes, you can choose to display input or output meters. See “Metering” on page 37 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual RC-SREV1 Display 19 Fader status—The status of each fader appears along the bottom of the display. For pages selected with the [PARAMETER MAIN] button, the names of the parameters assigned to the faders appear, and for pages selected with the [PARAMETER FINE] button, the channel names appear, as shown below. Parameter Channel SREV1—Owner’s Manual 20 Chapter 2—Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1 RC-SREV1 Rear Panel POWER ON DC 12V IN REMOTE LCD BRIGHT CONT 5 6 OFF 1 2 3 4 A POWER switch This switch is used to turn on the power to the RC-SREV1. Power is supplied by the SREV1 via the remote cable, or an optional AC adapter. See “Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1” on page 26 for more information. B DC 12V IN connector An optional AC adapter can be connected here (necessary when a custom-made remote cable is used). See “Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter” on page 27 for more information. C Adapter cable clip This clip is used to secure the optional AC adapter’s cable in order to prevent accidental disconnection. See “Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter” on page 27 for more information. D REMOTE port This 9-pin D-sub connector is used to connect the RC-SREV1 to the SREV1 with the remote cable supplied with the RC-SREV1. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” on page 22 for more information. E BRIGHT control This control is used to adjust the brightness of the display. See “Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast” on page 27 for more information. F CONT control This control is used to adjust the contrast of the display. See “Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast” on page 27 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Getting Started 21 Getting Started 3 In this chapter... First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning On & Off the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 22 23 26 26 26 27 27 28 29 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 22 Chapter 3—Getting Started First Steps Here’s how to get up and running with the SREV1. 1 Familiarize yourself with the SREV1 and RC-SREV1. See “Touring the SREV1 & RC-SREV1” on page 11. 2 Install any mini YGDAI I/O cards. See “I/O Options” on page 81. 3 Connect the RC-SREV1. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” below. 4 Connect your audio equipment to the inputs and outputs. See “Hookup Examples” on page 23. 5 Connect the power cord and turn on the SREV1. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 and “Turning On & Off the SREV1” on page 26. 6 Turn on the RC-SREV1 and Adjust the brightness and contrast. See “Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1” on page 26 and “Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast” on page 27. The SREV1 is now ready for use. Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller The RC-SREV1 should be connected to the SREV1 using the supplied 9-pin D-sub remote cable, as shown below. In addition to control signals, the cable carries power for the RC-SREV1, so make sure it’s attached securely. SLOT 1 SLOT 2 OUT 2 1 2 MIDI IN 1 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 OUT DIGITAL (AES/EBU) 1 3 IN Remote cable POWER DC 12V IN REMOTE LCD BRIGHT ON SREV1—Owner’s Manual OFF CONT 23 Hookup Examples Hookup Examples This section contains several hookup examples for both digital and analog I/O. Two-channel AES/EBU I/O This example shows how a digital mixer with AES/EBU format I/O can be connected to the SREV1’s onboard AES/EBU I/O for two-channel operation. The input feed can be used to carry one or two digital-audio signals, allowing either 1 in/2 out or 2 in/2 out operation. Remote cable AES/EBU Digital Mixer Aux send (AES/EBU) SREV1 1 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE INPUT CLIP CH 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP SLOT 1 BYPASS -1/DEC SLOT 2 +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM OUT 2 1 2 MIDI PARAMETER MAIN IN 1 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN PARAMETER FINE 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 CURSOR 3 UTILITY DIGITAL (AES/EBU) OUT IN 1 ENTER REMOTE RC-SREV1 Aux return/stereo in (AES/EBU) SREV1 settings Reverb mode: 2-channel Input assignment: AES1 (1–2) Wordclock source: AES/EBU 1 AES/EBU Four-channel AES/EBU I/O This example shows how a digital mixer with AES/EBU format I/O can be connected to the SREV1’s onboard AES/EBU I/O for four-channel operation. Each input feed can be used to carry one or two digital-audio signals, four signals in total, allowing 1 in/4 out, 2 in/4 out, 4 in/4 out operation (4-channel mode), or 1 in/2 out x2 or 2 in/2 out x2 operation (2-channel x2 mode). Remote cable AES/EBU Digital Mixer Aux send (AES/EBU) 2 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE SREV1 1 INPUT CLIP CH 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP SLOT 1 BYPASS -1/DEC SLOT 2 +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM OUT 2 1 2 1 MIDI PARAMETER MAIN IN 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN PARAMETER FINE 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 CURSOR 3 UTILITY OUT 2 DIGITAL (AES/EBU) 1 IN ENTER REMOTE RC-SREV1 Aux return/stereo in (AES/EBU) AES/EBU SREV1 settings Reverb mode: 4-channel or 2-channel x2 Input assignment: AES1 (1–2), AES2 (1–2) Wordclock source: AES/EBU 1 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 24 Chapter 3—Getting Started Optional I/O Card Digital I/O This example shows how a digital mixer with an AES/EBU connector can be connected to the SREV1 by using optional AES/EBU cards (MY8-AE). Up to four digital-audio input and output signals can be carried, allowing virtually any input/output configuration (e.g., 1 in/2 out, 2 in/4 out, 2 in/2 out x2, and so on). Remote cable AES/EBU Digital Mixer AES/EBU card *MY8-AE card (AES/EBU) SREV1 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE INPUT CLIP CH 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP SLOT 1 AES/EBU DIGITAL I/O CARD MODEL MY8-AE BYPASS -1/DEC SLOT 2 +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM OUT 2 1 2 MIDI PARAMETER MAIN IN 1 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN PARAMETER FINE 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 CURSOR 3 UTILITY DIGITAL (AES/EBU) OUT IN ENTER REMOTE RC-SREV1 *Alternatives: MY8-AT (ADAT format) MY8-TD (Tascam format) SREV1 settings Reverb mode: 2-channel, 4-channel, or 2-channel x2 Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–8) Wordclock source: MY8-AE 1/2 Two-channel Analog I/O This example shows how an analog mixer, or digital mixer with analog I/O, can be connected to the SREV1 by using optional A/D and D/A I/O cards (MY4-AD and MY4-DA) for two-channel operation. One or two analog audio signals can be input and output, allowing 1 in/2 out or 2 in/2 out operation. Analog/ Digital Mixer Remote cable MY4-AD card (analog) Aux send (analog) 2 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE 4 SREV1 1 3 AD CARD MODEL MY4-AD 2 1 SLOT 1 1 SLOT 2 INPUT CLIP CH ANALOG IN BYPASS 4 3 2 -1/DEC +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM DA CARD MODEL MY4-DA ANALOG OUT OUT 2 1 2 1 MIDI PARAMETER MAIN IN 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN PARAMETER FINE 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 CURSOR 3 UTILITY OUT DIGITAL (AES/EBU) 2 Aux return/stereo in (analog) IN 1 ENTER REMOTE MY4-DA card (analog) RC-SREV1 SREV1 settings Reverb mode: 2-channel Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–2) Wordclock source: INT 48K SREV1—Owner’s Manual 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP 25 Hookup Examples Four-channel Analog I/O This example shows how an analog mixer, or digital mixer with analog I/O, can be connected to the SREV1 by using optional A/D and D/A I/O cards (MY4-AD and MY4-DA) for four-channel operation. Between one and four channels can be used, allowing 1 in/4 out, 2 in/4 out, 4 in/4 out (4-channel mode), or 1 in/2 out x2 or 2 in/2 out x2 (2-channel x2 mode). Analog/ Digital Mixer Remote cable MY4-AD card (analog) Aux send (analog) 4 3 2 1 SREV1 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE 4 3 AD CARD MODEL MY4-AD 2 1 SLOT 1 1 SLOT 2 INPUT CLIP CH ANALOG IN -1/DEC BYPASS 4 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP 3 2 +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM DA CARD MODEL MY4-DA ANALOG OUT OUT 2 1 2 1 MIDI PARAMETER MAIN IN 2 SERIAL 1 REMOTE WORD CLOCK IN AC IN PARAMETER FINE 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 CURSOR 3 UTILITY OUT DIGITAL (AES/EBU) IN REMOTE 4 3 2 1 Aux return/stereo in (analog) ENTER MY4-DA card (analog) RC-SREV1 SREV1 settings Reverb mode: 4-channel or 2-channel x2 Input assignment: SLOT1 (1–4) Wordclock source: INT 48K SREV1—Owner’s Manual 26 Chapter 3—Getting Started Connecting the Power Cord Warning: Turn off all equipment before making any power connections. Connect the socket-end of the supplied power cord to the AC IN socket on the rear panel of the SREV1. Connect the plug-end to a suitable AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the power supply requirements stated on the SREV1 rear panel. Turning On & Off the SREV1 To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, SREV1, RC-SREV1, recorder, mixer, monitoring power amplifiers. 1 POWER To turn on the SREV1, press the [POWER] switch. The POWER indicator lights up. ON See “SREV1 Startup” on page 32 and “About the Internal Operations at Startup” on page 33 for more information. 2 OFF To turn off the SREV1, press the [POWER] switch again. The POWER indicator goes out. Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1 Note: In general, set the RC-SREV1 POWER switch to the ON position and use the SREV1 POWER switch to turn on and off the system. When using a custom-made remote cable, and an optional AC adapter, if the RC-SREV1 is turned on before the SREV1, the SREV1 must be turned on within 50 seconds. During this time the message “COULD NOT COMMUNICATE WITH SREV1. CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTION AND SREV1’S POWER. THEN TURN ON RC-SREV1 AGAIN.” appears. Therefore, turn on the RC-SREV1 after the SREV1. 1 To turn on the RC-SREV1, set its [POWER] switch to the ON position. POWER The startup screen appears, and after communication is established between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1, the Program page appears. See “RC-SREV1 Startup” on page 32 for more information. 2 To turn off the RC-SREV1, set its [POWER] switch to the OFF position. The RC-SREV1 receives its power from the SREV1 via the remote cable, so if it doesn’t come on, make sure that the remote cable is connected properly and that the SREV1 is turned on. SREV1—Owner’s Manual ON OFF 27 Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter Using an Optional RC-SREV1 AC Adapter The remote cable, which carries power from the SREV1 to the RC-SREV1, is 20 meters in length. Since the power loss in longer cables would be too great, an optional Yamaha PA-6 AC power supply adapter (12 V DC) is required to power the RC-SREV1 when using remote cables over 20 meters in length. A wiring diagram for making custom remote cables is available on page 91. See your Yamaha dealer for more information. The optional Yamaha PA-6 AC power supply adapter should be connected to the DC 12V IN connector on the rear of the RC-SREV1. DC 12V IN Loop the AC adapter cable around cable clip, shown here, to prevent accidental disconnection. IN DC 12V Warning: Use only the Yamaha PA-6 AC power supply adapter with the RC-SREV1. Using any other AC adapter may cause a fault, leading to a buildup of heat, fire, or an electrical shock hazard. POWER DC 12V IN REMOTE LCD BRIGHT ON CONT OFF Adjusting the RC-SREV1 Brightness & Contrast Both the brightness and contrast of the RC-SREV1 display can be adjusted to suit your working environment or personal preference. 1 LCD BRIGHT CONT Use the CONT control to set the display contrast. Contrast adjusts the balance between pixels that are on and those that are off. 2 Use the BRIGHT control to set the display brightness. Brightness adjusts the strength of the display’s backlight. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 28 Chapter 3—Getting Started Using CD-ROMs The SREV1 can load programs, projects, and impulse-response data files stored on ISO9660 Level 2 format CD-ROMs, which are also supported by Windows. CD-ROM Inserting & Ejecting CD-ROMs CD-ROMs can only be inserted and ejected while the SREV1 is turned on. 1 Press the CD-ROM eject button, and when the disc tray appears, pull it out. 2 With the labeled-side facing up, carefully fit the disc onto the central spindle. (The disc sits flat when it’s in correctly.) 3 Push the disc tray fully into the SREV1 to close it. When a CD-ROM is being read, the activity indicator lights up. The SREV1 takes between 20 and 30 seconds to recognize a CD-ROM after it’s inserted. 4 To eject a CD-ROM, press the eject button. 5 When the disc tray appears, pull it out, remove the disc, and then push the tray back into the SREV1 in order to close it. Always store CD-ROMs in their cases. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Using PC Cards 29 Using PC Cards PC ATA CARD FLASH CARD MEMORY CARD The SREV1 can store programs, projects, and impulse-response data on standard PC Cards (PCMCIA). The SREV1 supports the PC Card ATA specification and the FAT16 file system, which is also supported by Windows. Use PCMCIA flash ATA cards (Type II) or CompactFlash cards with a PC Card adapter. Inserting & Ejecting PC Cards 1 Insert the PC Card face up into the MEMORY CARD slot and push it in all the way. (The eject button sticks out all the way when the card is fully inserted.) The PC Card should be recognized and available for use in a few seconds. Although rare, in some cases the PC Card may not be recognized. If this happens, try reinserting the card. If it’s not recognized after several tries, contact your Yamaha dealer. When a card is being written or read, the activity indicator lights up. Do not eject the card, or turn off the power while this indicator is lit. 2 To eject a card, make sure that the activity indicator is not lit, and then press the eject button. The card ejects. 3 Remove the card from the slot. When using a compact card with an adapter, pull the adapter to remove the card from the slot. Pulling only the card may damage it. The speed at which data can be written and read on a PC Card depends on its type. Always store PC Cards in their cases. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 31 Basic Operation 4 In this chapter... SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC-SREV1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Internal Operations at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Reverb Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input & Output Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Meter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypassing the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Title Edit dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Quick Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 40 41 42 45 48 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 32 Chapter 4—Basic Operation SREV1 Startup When the SREV1 is turned on, its INPUT and OUTPUT signal indicators light up in sequence. During this time, the SREV1 loads impulse-response data for the current program and the programs in Quick memory from the Internal Card, and, if necessary, from the PC Card or CD-ROM. At this time, the SREV1 cannot be used. After about 30 seconds, when the necessary impulse-response data has been loaded, the CLIP and SIGNAL indicators go out and the SREV1 is ready for use. Note that the startup time will be different if the current program or the programs in Quick memory are on PC Card or CD-ROM. If the SREV1 does not output any sound, check your audio connections, and the input assignments. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. RC-SREV1 Startup In Principle, the RC-SREV1 should be started up after the SREV1 has completed its startup. However, when the RC-SREV1 is connected to one SREV1 using the supplied remote cable, and that SREV1 is supplying power to the RC-SREV1, so long as the RC-SREV1 POWER switch is set to the ON position, the RC-SREV1 will be turned on at the same time as the SREV1 is turned on, and the RC-SREV1 will startup normally. If, however, you are using multiple SREV1s, connected together using serial cables, make sure that all SREV1s have completed startup before turning on the RC-SREV1. When the RC-SREV1 is turned on, startup screen 1 appears for one second. Then startup screen 2 appears with an animated waveform moving from left to right. During this time, the RC-SREV1 receives necessary operating information from the SREV1 via the serial cable. When all the information has been received, the Program page appears. When the RC-SREV1 is turned on after the SREV1 has completed its startup, the above procedure takes 15 seconds. When the RC-SREV1 is turned on at the same time as the SREV1, it takes 45 seconds to start up, although the actual time will depend on the time it takes the SREV1 to start up. If there is no animation on startup screen 2, there may be a communication error between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1. In this case, turn off both units and check the remote cable connections, also check for breaks in the cable. Startup screen 1 SREV1—Owner’s Manual Startup screen 2 About the Internal Operations at Startup 33 About the Internal Operations at Startup During startup, the SREV1 loads the necessary programs into the current and Quick program memories in order to restore the SREV1 to the same state it was in before it was last turned off. If any of these programs were previously loaded from a PC Card or CD-ROM and then stored to a Quick memory, the same PC Card or CD-ROM will be required to restore the contents of the Quick memories. In this case, be sure to insert the necessary PC Card or CD-ROM before starting the SREV1. Although the SREV1’s battery-backed memory stores the titles of the current and Quick memory programs, it does not store the actual program or impulse-response data, so this must be loaded each time the SREV1 is started. If a necessary PC Card or CD-ROM is not inserted, the message “DATA FILE NOT FOUND! INSERT PCMCIA CARD” or “DATA FILE NOT FOUND! INSERT CD-ROM DISC” appears once the RC-SREV1 has completed startup. In this case, insert the necessary PC Card or CD-ROM and try loading again. Note that the above information regarding necessary PC Cards and CD-ROMs also applies to changing the Reverb mode and loading projects. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 34 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Selecting Reverb Modes This section explains how to select the 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2 Reverb modes. See page 6 for more information about each mode. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Setup page shown below. Reverb mode 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the 2CH, 4CH, or 2CHX2 button in the REV MODE section of the page. 3 Press the [ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears. 4 Select YES to continue, or select NO to cancel the operation. 5 Press the [ENTER] button. While the SREV1 switches to the selected Reverb mode, the RC-SREV1 displays the message “SETTING REV MODE...” and the SREV1 INPUT and OUTPUT signal indicators light up in sequence. Note: Do not insert or eject a PC Card or CD-ROM while the SREV1 is changing Reverb modes. Once the mode has been set, the mode title appears in the Reverb mode section of the display, the Program page is selected, and the cursor appears at the same position it does when the power is turned on. The SREV1 switches to the selected mode, the mode title appears in the Reverb mode section of the display, and the Program page is selected. The SREV1 stores all program parameters when the mode is changed, so when you return to a mode, the previous settings are restored. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Assigning Inputs 35 Assigning Inputs This section explains how to assign the AES/EBU inputs and slot inputs to channels. When a four input I/O card, such as the MY4-AD, is installed, only the first four inputs of that slot are available. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the DIO page. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the dots in the INPUT SELECT section of the page. A dotted circle indicates that an input is assignable; two dots indicate that an input is unavailable. 3 Press the [ENTER] button to assign an input to a channel. The input is assigned to the channel and the dotted circle changes to a solid dot. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 36 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Setting Input & Output Levels Input and output signal levels can be set on two different pages: Main 2 page or Meter I/O page. On the Main 2 page, levels are adjusted for all channels simultaneously as a group, while on the Meter I/O page, they can be adjusted for each channel individually. This section explains how to adjust input and output levels on the Meter I/O page. See page 54 for information on the Main 2 page. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT LEVEL and OUTPUT LEVEL parameters for each channel. 3 Use the faders to set the levels. The DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons can also be used to set levels in 0.1 dB steps. The input and output levels can be set from –∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Metering 37 Metering Input and output signal levels can be metered in several places: the 14-segment meters on the RC-SREV1 display pages, the 11-segment meters on the Meter I/O page, the SIGNAL and CLIP indicators on the SREV1, and the CLIP indicators on the RC-SREV1. The Peak Hold function works with all of these meters. See “Using Peak Hold” on page 39 for more information. 14-segment Meters Input and output signal levels can be metered by using the 14-segment meters that appear on most RC-SREV1 display pages. In 2-channel mode, input and output signal levels can be metered simultaneously. In 4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode, however, either the input or output levels can be metered, not both simultaneously. See “Setting the Meter Mode” on page 39 for more information. The 14-segment LCD meters have the following resolution: CLIP / –3dB / –6dB / –9dB / –12dB / –15dB / –18dB / –24dB / –30dB / –36dB / –42dB / –48dB / –54dB / –60dB. The following table shows how the input and output meters appear in each mode. Mode 2-channel 4-channel 2-channel x2 Meter I/O INPUT & OUTPUT Channels Left, right INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT Use the METER MODE option on the Meter I/O page to switch between OUTPUT and INPUT (see page 39). Front-left, front-right, rear-left, rear-right A-left, A-right, B-left, B-right SREV1—Owner’s Manual 38 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Meter I/O Page Input and output signal levels for all channels can be metered by using the 11-segment meters on the Meter I/O pages shown below, which are located by using the [UTILITY] button. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode The 11-segment LCD meters have the following resolution: CLIP, –3 dB, –6dB, –9 dB, –12dB, –15 dB, –18dB, –24 dB, –30dB, –36 dB, –42dB SREV1 SIGNAL and CLIP indicators Input and output signal levels for each channel can be metered by using the SIGNAL and CLIP indicators on the SREV1 front panel. The SIGNAL indicators light up when the signal is 34 dB below clipping and are intended to show the presence of a signal, while the CLIP indicators light up when the signal is actually clipping. INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K RC-SREV1 CLIP indicators Input and output signal levels for each channel can be metered for clipping by using the CLIP indicators on the RC-SREV1. These indicators light up when a signal is clipping. INPUT CLIP CH OUTPUT CLIP SREV1—Owner’s Manual 1 2 3 4 Setting the Meter Mode 39 Setting the Meter Mode In 4-channel or 2-channel x2 mode, the 14-segment meters that appear on most RC-SREV1 display pages can be set to display either input or output signal levels by using the METER MODE option. In 2-channel mode, meters for both the inputs and outputs (left and right) are always displayed, so the METER MODE option is not available when this mode is selected. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the METER MODE button. 3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between INPUT and OUTPUT mode. The 14-segment meters are set accordingly. Using Peak Hold By keeping the highest lit segment of each meter illuminated, the Peak Hold function offers a convenient way to check for signal peaks. In addition to the meters on the RC-SREV1 display pages, the Peak Hold function also works with the dedicated CLIP indicators on the SREV1 and RC-SREV1. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PEAK HOLD button. 3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between OFF and ON. The Peak Hold function is set accordingly. To reset the Peak Hold function, turn it off and then back on again. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 40 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Bypassing the SREV1 The SREV1 can be bypassed by using the [BYPASS] button. When the bypass function is on, the BYPASS indicator lights up and the word “ON” appears in the BYPASS area of the display, as shown below. Bypass BYPASS Button Display SREV1 BYPASS Off Normal operation BYPASS Bypassed1 On 1. Depends on the Bypass mode: Direct-out/Rev-mute. See below. Setting the Bypass Mode The Bypass function can be set so that it bypasses all processing (Direct-out) or just mutes the reverb processing (Rev-mute), in which case output signals are still affected by the Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters. Input Meter Output Meter On Initial Delay Pre EQ Convolution Input Level 1 On Post EQ Off Bypass (Rev Mute) Reverb Balance Reverb Level Off Bypass (Direct Out) Output Level Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Meter I/O page. Bypass status 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the BYPASS MODE button. 3 Use the [ENTER] button to toggle between DIRECT-OUT and REV-MUTE. The Bypass mode is set accordingly. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Using the Title Edit dialog Box 41 Using the Title Edit dialog Box The Title Edit dialog box is used to title programs and projects, and it appears automatically when saving programs or projects, or when editing the titles of existing programs or projects. Titles can contain up to 27 characters, and both uppercase and lowercase letters and the plus (+) and minus (–) symbols are available. Uppercase Lowercase Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to move the cursor within the title. Use the CAPS LOCK button to access the lowercase and uppercase letters. To enter a character, use the cursor buttons to select it, and then press the [ENTER] button. The selected character is inserted into the title at the cursor position and the cursor automatically moves one place to the right. Use the SPC button to enter a space at the cursor position. Use the INS button to insert a space at the cursor position and move the subsequent characters to the right. Characters that are moved beyond the right-hand side of the title window are lost. Use the DEL button to delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left. When you’ve finished editing, select the OK button and then press the [ENTER] button. (The message “CHANGING TITLE...” appears as the title is changed.) To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press the [ENTER] button. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 42 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Working with Quick Memories This section explains how to recall, store, title, and protect programs in Quick memory. All these operations are carried out on the Program pages shown below. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Program pages are available: Program-A and Program-B. There are six Quick memories available in 2-channel or 4-channel mode (P01–P06); 12 in 2-channel x2 mode (P01–P12). In the program list, a dotted box highlights the selected program. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B Recalling Programs Programs stored in Quick memories can be recalled instantly. The recalled program becomes the current program. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page. 2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program from the list. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL button, and then press [ENTER]. If the current program contains unsaved changes, a warning message appears. Select YES to discard the changes and recall the selected program, or select NO to cancel the operation. The selected program is recalled and its number and title appear on the display. In 2-channel x2 mode, when a program is recalled for reverberator A, reverberator B is muted, unless the optional DB-SREV1 Expansion Board is installed. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Working with Quick Memories 43 Storing Programs The current program can be stored to any Quick memory. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page. 2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Quick memory. Programs cannot be stored to Quick memories containing write-protected programs. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 4 Enter a title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) The current program is stored to the selected Quick memory, and the Edit status indicator disappears (see page 18). Editing Program Titles The titles of programs already stored in the Quick memories can be edited as follows. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page. 2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program. The titles of write-protected programs cannot be edited. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 4 Edit the title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) Note that the “CHANGING TITLE...” message does not appear in this case. The new title is stored. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 44 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Protecting Quick Memory Programs Quick memory programs can be write-protected to prevent accidental overwriting. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Program page. 2 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the program’s title. 4 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the program. The Protect icon disappears. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Working with the Library 45 Working with the Library This section explains how to load, save, title, protect, and delete programs from the Internal Card, PC Card, and CD-ROM. These operations are carried out on the Library pages shown below. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Library pages are available: Library-A and Library-B. In the program list, a dotted box highlights the selected program. In the DRIVE section of the page, INTERNAL is the Internal Card, CD-ROM is the CD-ROM drive, and PCMCIA is the PC Card. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B Loading Programs from the Library Programs can be loaded from the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. The loaded program becomes the current program. The preset programs on the supplied CD-ROM are loaded into the Internal Card at the factory. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program from the list. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the LOAD button, and then press [ENTER]. If the current program contains unsaved changes, a warning message appears. Select YES to discard the changes and load the selected program, or select NO to cancel the operation. The selected program, and its impulse-response data, is loaded and its title appears on the display. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 46 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Note that unlike the Quick memory programs, which load instantly, programs stored on the drives take time to load, depending on the size of the associated impulse-response data and the speed of the drive. In 2-channel x2 mode, when a program is loaded for reverberator A, reverberator B is muted, unless the optional DB-SREV1 Expansion Board is installed. Saving Programs in the Library The current program can be saved to the following drives: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 4 Enter a title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) If a program with the same title already exists, a confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to overwrite the existing program, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that if the existing program is write-protected, it cannot be overwritten. The current program, and its impulse-response data, is saved to the selected drive, and the Edit status indicator disappears (see page 18). Editing Program Titles in the Library The titles of programs stored on the following drives can be edited: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program. The titles of write-protected programs cannot be edited. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 5 Edit the title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 6 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) The new title is saved. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Working with the Library 47 Protecting Library Programs Programs stored on the following drives can be write-protected to prevent accidental deletion: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the program’s title. 5 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the program. The Protect icon disappears. Deleting Library Programs Programs stored on the following drives can be deleted: Internal Card or PC Card. The preset programs loaded into the Internal Card at the factory are also available on the supplied CD-ROM. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Library page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The programs stored on the active drive appear in the program list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a program. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER]. A confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to delete the program, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that if the program is write-protected, it cannot be deleted. The program, and its impulse-response data, is deleted and disappears from the list. If the impulse-response data is required by another program, it’s not deleted. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 48 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Working with Projects This section explains how to load, save, title, protect, and delete projects from the Internal, PC Card, and CD-ROM drives. All these operations are carried out on the Project pages shown below. In the project list, a dotted box highlights the selected project. See page 7 for more information about projects. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode Loading Projects Projects can be loaded from the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project from the list. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the LOAD button, and then press [ENTER]. A confirmation message appears. Select YES to load the project, or select NO to cancel the operation. The message “LOADING PROJECT...” appears while the selected project and its programs are loaded. The Program page appears when loading, which takes about 30 seconds, is complete. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Working with Projects 49 Saving Projects Projects, which consist of all the Quick memory programs and the current program settings, can be saved to the following drives: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The projects already stored on the active drive appear in the project list. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 4 Enter a title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) If a project with the same title already exists, a confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to overwrite the existing project, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that if the existing project is write-protected it cannot be overwritten. The project is saved to the selected drive. Editing Project Titles The titles of projects stored on the following drives can be edited: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project. The titles of write-protected projects cannot be edited. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit dialog box appears. 5 Edit the title. See “Using the Title Edit dialog Box” on page 41 for more information. 6 Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, and then press [ENTER]. (To cancel the operation, select the CANCEL button and then press [ENTER].) The new title is saved. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 50 Chapter 4—Basic Operation Protecting Projects Projects stored on the following drives can be write-protected to prevent accidental deletion: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT button, and then press [ENTER]. The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of the project’s title. 5 Press the [ENTER] button again to unprotect the project. The Protect icon disappears. Deleting Projects Projects stored on the following drives can be deleted: Internal Card or PC Card. 1 Use the [PROGRAM] button to locate the Project page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The projects stored on the active drive appear in the project list. 3 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a project. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER]. A confirmation dialog box appears. Select YES to delete the project, or select NO to cancel the operation. Note that if the project is write-protected, it cannot be deleted. The selected project is deleted and disappears from the list. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Editing Programs 51 Editing Programs 5 In this chapter... Main 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fine Reverb Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Impulse-Response Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 54 56 57 59 61 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 52 Chapter 5—Editing Programs Main 1 Parameters Basic parameters, including Reverb Time, Initial Delay, Pre EQ Low Gain, and Pre EQ High Gain, can be adjusted on the Main 1 pages. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Main 1 pages are available: Main1-A and Main1-B. Channels are grouped, so adjusting, say, the Reverb Time parameter, adjusts the reverb time of all channels simultaneously. In 2-channel x2 mode, A and B parameters are grouped independently. These parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Fine parameter pages. See page 56 and page 57 for more information. The graphs and parameter values of only one channel are displayed at a time. You can choose which channel by using the buttons in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section of the page. Below that section is the REV graph, which displays the reverb parameter settings graphically, and the PRE-EQ graph, which displays the Pre EQ settings graphically. If the EQ is turned off on the Pre EQ page (see page 57), the EQ graph appears shaded. The Main 1 pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B 1 Use the [PARAMETER MAIN] button to locate the Main 1 page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a channel button in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section, and then press the [ENTER] button to make it the active display channel. The button of the active display channel appears highlighted. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV TIME, INITIAL DELAY, LOW-EQ, or HIGH-EQ parameter. 4 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the selected parameter. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Main 1 Parameters 53 Note that since adjustments to the REV TIME parameter do not take effect immediately, there is a small delay between adjusting the reverb time by using, for example, a fader and the new reverb time being applied. The parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter Range Steps Description REV TIME 0.3–1 0.1 sec Reverb time INITIAL DELAY 0.1–500.0 ms 0.1 ms Initial delay time LOW-EQ –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB 0.1 dB Pre EQ low gain HIGH-EQ –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB 0.1 dB Pre EQ high gain 1. Actual maximum reverb time depends on the impulse-response data. The following waveforms show the reverb produced by a snare drum with reverb times of 500 milliseconds and 2.0 seconds. Initial delay is 0.1 milliseconds; reverb balance is 100%. The third waveform shows how reflections can be delayed by using the Initial Delay parameter. Here the reverb time is 2.0 seconds; initial delay is 200 ms (exaggerated for illustration clarity); and the reverb balance is 50%. Amplitude Reverb time: 500 ms Initial delay: 0.1 ms Reverb balance: 100% Time Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec Initial delay: 0.1 ms Reverb balance: 100% Time Direct signal Amplitude Reflections Reverb time: 2.0 sec Initial delay: 200 ms Reverb balance: 50% Initial delay Time SREV1—Owner’s Manual 54 Chapter 5—Editing Programs Main 2 Parameters Basic parameters, including Reverb Balance, Input Level, Output Level, and Pre EQ HPF frequency, can be adjusted on the Main 2 pages. In 2-channel x2 mode, two Main 2 pages are available: Main2-A and Main2-B. Channels are grouped, so adjusting, say, the Reverb Balance parameter, adjusts the reverb balance of all channels simultaneously. In 2-channel x2 mode, A and B parameters are grouped independently. These parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Fine parameter pages. See page 56 and page 57 for more information. The graphs and parameter values of only one channel are displayed at a time. You can choose which channel by using the buttons in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section of the page. Below that section is the REV graph, which displays the reverb parameter settings graphically, and the PRE-EQ graph, which displays the Pre EQ settings graphically. If the EQ is turned off on the Pre EQ page (see page 57), the EQ graph appears shaded. Likewise, if the HPF filter type parameter is set to THRU on the Pre EQ page, that also appears shaded. The Main 2 pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B 1 Use the [PARAMETER MAIN] button to locate the Main 2 page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a channel button in the DISPLAY CHANNEL section, and then press the [ENTER] button to make it the active display channel. The button of the active display channel appears highlighted. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV BALANCE, INPUT LEVEL, OUTPUT LEVEL, or HPF parameter. 4 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the selected parameter. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Main 2 Parameters 55 The parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter Range Steps Description REV BALANCE 0–100% 1% Balance between reverb and dry signals. 0% = all dry, 100% = all reverb. INPUT LEVEL –∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Input level OUTPUT LEVEL –∞, –72.0 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Output level HPF 16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz 1/12 oct Pre EQ HPF frequency Reverb Balance The following waveforms illustrate the effect of the Reverb Balance parameter. The sound source is a snare drum Direct signal Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec Initial delay: 0.1 ms Reverb balance: 0% Time Amplitude Direct signal & reflections Reverb time: 2.0 sec Initial delay: 0.1 ms Reverb balance: 50% Time All reflections Amplitude Reverb time: 2.0 sec Initial delay: 0.1 ms Reverb balance: 100% Time SREV1—Owner’s Manual 56 Chapter 5—Editing Programs Fine Reverb Parameters Reverb Time, Initial Delay, Reverb Balance, and Reverb Level parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Rev page, although there is an option to group them. In addition to numeric values, settings are displayed graphically. The Rev pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode 1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Rev page. Use the ON/OFF button in the GROUP section to group and ungroup the channels. When set to ON, all channels are adjusted simultaneously. When set to OFF, channels can be adjusted individually. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV TIME, INITIAL DELAY, REV BALANCE, or REV LEVEL parameter. 3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the selected parameter. Note that since adjustments to the REV TIME parameter do not take effect immediately, there is a small delay between adjusting the reverb time by using, for example, a fader and the new reverb time being applied, especially when channels are grouped. The parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter Range Steps Description REV TIME 0.3–1 0.1 sec Reverb time INITIAL DELAY 0.1–500.0 ms 0.1 ms Delay before reverb starts REV BALANCE 0–100% 1% Balance between reverb and dry signals. 0% = all dry, 100% = all reverb. REV LEVEL –∞, –72 dB to +6.0 dB 0.1 dB Reverb level 1. Actual maximum reverb time depends on the impulse-response data. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Pre EQ 57 Pre EQ The pre-convolution EQ consists of a variable frequency HPF and fully parametric 3-band EQ. Parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Pre EQ pages. In 4-channel mode, two Pre EQ pages are available: Pre EQ Front and Pre EQ Rear. Likewise, in 2-channel x2 mode, with Pre EQ-A and Pre EQ-B pages. In addition to numeric values, EQ settings are displayed graphically. Inactive parameters appear shaded. Q, for example, is not active when, say, the HIGH band is set to H.SHELF. The Pre EQ pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode—Front 4-ch mode—Rear 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B Note that the LOW band gain and HIGH band gain parameters can also be adjusted on the Main 1 page (see page 52). Likewise, the HPF frequency parameter can also be adjusted on the Main 2 page (see page 54). On these pages, however, the channels are grouped. 1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Pre EQ page. Use the ON/OFF button next to each EQ graph to turn on and off the Pre EQ for each channel. Note that these buttons also turn on and off the LOW band and HIGH band parameters on the Main 1 page. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 58 Chapter 5—Editing Programs 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the G (gain), F (frequency), Q (width), or T (Filter Type) parameter. 3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the selected parameter. The parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter Gain (G) HPF — Frequency (F) Q LOW1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. HIGH3 –18 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB steps) 16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz (1/12 oct steps) — Filter Type (T) MID2 THRU4, HPF 10.0–0.10 PEAKING, L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING, H.SHELF, LPF, THRU5 Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10) or low shelving EQ (L.SHELF). Peaking EQ. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), high shelving EQ (H.SHELF), or low pass filter (LPF). The HPF is bypassed when set to THRU. The HIGH band is bypassed when set to THRU. Note that when the HPF is set to THRU, the HPF parameter on the Main 2 page is inactive. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Post EQ 59 Post EQ The post-convolution EQ consists of a fully parametric 4-band EQ. Parameters can be adjusted for each channel individually on the Post EQ page. In 4-channel mode, two Post EQ pages are available: Post EQ Front and Post EQ Rear. Likewise, in 2-channel x2 mode, with Post EQ-A and Post EQ-B pages. In addition to numeric values, EQ settings are displayed graphically. Inactive parameters appear shaded. Q, for example, is not active when, say, the HIGH band is set to H.SHELF. The Post EQ pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 1 4-ch mode—Front 4-ch mode—Rear 2-ch x2 mode—A 2-ch x2 mode—B Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Post EQ page. Use the ON/OFF button next to each EQ graph to turn on and off the Post EQ for each channel. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the G (gain), F (frequency), Q (width) or T (Filter Type) parameter. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 60 Chapter 5—Editing Programs 3 Use the faders, DATA wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust the selected parameter. The parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter LOW1 Gain (G) H-MID3 HIGH4 –18 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB steps) Frequency (F) 16.0 Hz–23.6 kHz (1/12 oct steps) Q 10.0–0.10 Filter Type (T) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. SREV1—Owner’s Manual L-MID2 PEAKING, L.SHELF, HPF, THRU5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING, H.SHELF, LPF, THRU6 Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), low shelving EQ (L.SHELF), or high pass filter (HPF). Peaking EQ. Peaking EQ. Can be used as a peaking EQ (10–0.10), high shelving EQ (H.SHELF), or low pass filter (LPF). The HPF and LPF are bypassed when set to THRU. The HIGH band is bypassed when set to THRU. Loading Impulse-Response Data 61 Loading Impulse-Response Data This section explains how to load impulse-response data for each channel of the current program from the Internal Card, PC Card, CD-ROM drive. Impulse response data stored in the following formats can be loaded: TM4 or TMC. See “File Types” on page 9 for more information. In the impulse-response file list, a dotted box highlights the selected file. The Protect icon ( ) appears to the right of write-protected files. In the DRIVE section of the page, INTERNAL is the Internal Card, CD-ROM is the CD-ROM drive, and PCMCIA is the PC Card. The Data Load pages for each mode are shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode 1 Use the [PARAMETER FINE] button to locate the Rev page. 2 Select the DATA LOAD button, and then press [ENTER]. The Data Load page appears. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select a drive button, and then press [ENTER] to make it the active drive. The impulse-response data stored on the active drive appear in the file list. 4 Use the DATA wheel or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a file from the list. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the channel to which you want to load the impulse-response data, and then press [ENTER]. A warning message appears. Select YES to load the selected file, or select NO to cancel the operation. The selected impulse-response data is loaded. 6 To return to the Rev page, select the BACK button, and then press [ENTER]. The Rev page appears. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 62 Chapter 5—Editing Programs Impulse-response data (TM4 format) created by using IRSampler, the impulse-response sampling software, or IREdit, the impulse-response editing software, can be loaded into the SREV1 from a PC Card. The RC-SREV1 looks for impulse-response data stored in the “\yamaha\srev\data” folder of the PC Card, so you need to make a new folder called “data” in “x:\yamaha\srev\” and then copy your impulse-response data into it. (Note that “x” refers to the letter assigned to your PC Card while it’s inserted in your PC.) The 2-channel (SP2) and 4-channel (SP4) programs that you create are stored in the “\yamaha\srev\prog” folder, and 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2 projects are stored in the “\yamaha\srev\proj” folder. When you copy or move any of these files to another PC Card by using your PC, be sure to use the same folder organization and naming, otherwise, the SREV1 will not be able to find the files. Note that the SREV1 can only list up to 128 files in a folder, so do not put any more files than that into a folder. If you do have more than 128 files in a folder, the SREV1 lists the first 128 files copied to the folder in alphabetical order. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Multiple SREV1s 63 Multiple SREV1s 6 In this chapter... About Multiple SREV1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-unit Operating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 64 65 65 64 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 64 Chapter 6—Multiple SREV1s About Multiple SREV1s Up to four SREV1s can be controlled from a single RC-SREV1. Connections Multiple SREV1s are connected together in a daisy-chain fashion using the SERIAL ports shown here. Connections between units are made using serial cables, which are available from your Yamaha dealer. 2 SERIAL 1 Multiple-unit Hookup with the RC-SREV1 The following example shows how up to four SREV1s can be connected together in a daisy-chain fashion for control from an RC-SREV1. The SREV1 connected to the RC-SREV1 is automatically assigned ID #1, and the other SREV1s are assigned IDs in order of connection, as shown. Remote cable SREV1 #1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD INPUT CLIP CH REMOTE 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT CLIP SERIAL 2 Serial cable BYPASS -1/DEC +1/INC PARAMETER PROGRAM PARAMETER MAIN SREV1 #2 SERIAL 1 PARAMETER FINE CURSOR POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF RC-SREV1 SERIAL 2 Serial cable SREV1 #3 SERIAL 1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD SERIAL 2 Serial cable SREV1 #4 SERIAL 1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON SREV1—Owner’s Manual ENTER CD-ROM MEMORY CARD MEMORY CARD UTILITY FS LOCK 48K 1 CD-ROM OFF Multiple-unit Operating Notes 65 Multiple-unit Operating Notes • The RC-SREV1 should be connected to SREV1 #1. • Connect the SREV1s together by using serial cables. • Turn on the SREV1s first, and then the RC-SREV1. • Do not connect or disconnect any serial cables while the system is up and running. • Do not turn off any of the SREV1s while the system is up and running. Selecting SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 This section explains how to select the SREV1 to be controlled from the RC-SREV1. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the Setup page shown below. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the SREV #1, SREV #2, SREV #3, or SREV #4 button in the CONNECT section of the page. The button of the currently selected SREV1 appears highlighted. The buttons of unconnected SREV1s appear shaded. 3 Press the [ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears. 4 Select YES to continue, or select NO to cancel the operation. 5 Press the [ENTER] button. The RC-SREV1 retrieves system information such as Reverb mode, and wordclock source from the selected SREV1, and then updates its display. The number of the selected SREV1 appears in the top-right corner of the display (see page 18). SREV1—Owner’s Manual MIDI 67 MIDI 7 In this chapter... MIDI & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the MIDI Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 68 69 69 70 71 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 68 Chapter 7—MIDI MIDI & the SREV1 The SREV1 supports the following MIDI messages: • Program Changes to recall up to 12 Quick memory programs • Control Changes for Reverb Balance and Reverb Level control These MIDI messages are not transmitted when actions are performed on RC-SREV1. Quick memory programs can be assigned to MIDI Program Changes and then recalled remotely from other MIDI equipment. When a Program Change message is received, the program stored in the assigned Quick memory is recalled. See “Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes” on page 70 for more information. The Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters for each channel can be assigned to MIDI Control Changes and then controlled remotely from other MIDI equipment. When a Control Change message is received, the assigned parameter is controlled. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71 for more information. The SREV1 can be set to receive Program Change and Control Change messages on any MIDI Channel from 1 through 16, and in 2-channel x2 mode, individual MIDI Channels can be set for A and B. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69 for more information. Note: Do not control the SREV1 by using MIDI messages and the RC-SREV1 simultaneously. MIDI Ports The MIDI IN and OUT ports are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. The MIDI IN port receives messages, while the MIDI OUT port currently echoes the messages received at the MIDI IN port, essentially like a MIDI THRU port. SREV1—Owner’s Manual OUT MIDI IN MIDI Pages 69 MIDI Pages MIDI settings are made on the MIDI pages shown below. 2-ch mode 4-ch mode 2-ch x2 mode Setting the MIDI Receive Channels The MIDI Channel used to receive MIDI Program Change and Control Change messages is set on the MIDI page. There are two MIDI Channel settings in 2-channel x2 mode, one for A and one for B. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the CH parameter in the MIDI RECEIVE CHANNEL section of the page. 3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a MIDI Channel from 1 through 16 or OFF. When OFF is selected, the SREV1 ignores received MIDI messages. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 70 Chapter 7—MIDI Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes Quick memory programs P01 through P06 (2-channel or 4-channel mode), P01–P12 (2-channel x2 mode) can be assigned to Program Changes 1 through 128. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. parameter in the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE section of the page. 3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to assign a Program Change from 1 through 128 to the selected Quick memory program. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the PROGRAM NO. parameter in the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE section of the page. 5 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Quick memory program from P01 through P12, or “---” for no assignment. Quick memory program number assignments P07 through P12 are active only in 2-channel x2 mode. In 2-channel and 4-channel mode, they are ignored. When a Program Change message is received, the program stored in the assigned Quick memory is recalled along with the necessary impulse-response data, and the program’s number and title appear on the display, and the Edit indicator, if displayed, disappears. The following illustration shows the type of MIDI equipment that can be used with the SREV1 for remote Quick memory program recall using Program Change messages. SREV1 MIDI keyboard MIDI mixer PHANTOM +48V PHANTOM +48V OFF ON OFF ON INPUT (BAL) 13 –10dBV (UNBAL) 15 L R 14 16 IN OUT 2TR PHONES PAD 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15/16 2TR IN POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 2 3 GAIN –20 13/14 +10 GAIN MONITOR 2TR IN –20 15/16 0 LEVEL 10 0 MONITOR OUT LEVEL 10 PHONES FS LOCK MIDI IN 48K 1 +10 4 44.1K ON OFF DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE L STEREO R EQ HIGH UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/ ROUTING PAN PAN FUNCTION MIDI Sampler LO-MID G FADER MODE EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O AUX 1 AUX 2 REMOTE AUX 3 CLIP –3 –6 –9 –12 –15 –18 –24 –30 –36 –42 –48 HI-MID F F MEMORY G 1 RETURN 2 LOW SELECTED CHANNEL AUX 4 HOME 1 MEMORY CARD CD-ROM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13/14 15/16 17 SEL 18 SEL 19 SEL 20 SEL 21 SEL 22 SEL 23 SEL 24 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STEREO MASTER SEL 1 RETURN 2 SEL SOLO ON ON SEL SOLO SOLO ON –1/DEC MEMORY +1/INC PARAMETER 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 –5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 –10 –15 5 5 10 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 10 20 20 5 5 10 10 20 20 –40 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ –70 –∞ –20 CURSOR –30 –50 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ ENTER MIDI controller SREV1—Owner’s Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13/14 15/16 STEREO MASTER 71 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes Assigning Parameters to Control Changes Reverb Balance and Reverb Level parameters for each channel can be assigned to MIDI Control Changes 0 through 95. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the MIDI page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REV BALANCE or REV LEVEL assignments in the CONTROL CHANGE section of the page. In 2-channel mode, these are L-CH and R-CH. In 4-channel mode, Front-L, Front-R, Rear-L, and Rear-R. And in 2-channel x2 mode, A-L, A-R, B-L, and B-R. 3 Use the DATA wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to assign a Control Change to OFF or 0 through 95. When a Control Change message is received, the assigned parameter is controlled. If the Rev page is selected, you can see the parameter value update, and if the parameter is the currently selected parameter, then the corresponding fader moves as well. If a Control Change is assigned to more than one parameter, all the assigned parameters are controlled when that Control Change is received. Since Control Changes are assigned to channels individually, they are not affected by the GROUP button on the Rev page. Even if channels are grouped, only the assigned channel parameter is controlled when a Control Change message is received. If a page selected by using the [PARAMETER FINE] button is displayed when a Control Change message is received, the corresponding fader moves and the graph and parameter values change, causing the Edit status indicator to appear. If a page selected by using the [PARAMETER MAIN] button is displayed when a Control Change message is received, the corresponding fader, graph, and parameter value do not change. Only the Edit status indicator appears. To update the fader, graph, and parameter value, select another page, then select the previous page again. The following illustration shows the type of MIDI equipment that can be used with the SREV1 for remote parameter control using Control Change messages. SREV1 MIDI keyboard MIDI mixer PHANTOM +48V PHANTOM +48V OFF ON OFF ON INPUT (BAL) 13 –10dBV (UNBAL) 15 L R 14 16 IN OUT 2TR PHONES PAD 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 –16 –60 +10 GAIN –34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15/16 2TR IN POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 2 3 GAIN –20 13/14 +10 GAIN MONITOR 2TR IN –20 15/16 0 LEVEL 10 0 MONITOR OUT LEVEL 10 PHONES FS LOCK MIDI IN 48K 1 +10 4 44.1K ON OFF DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE L STEREO R EQ HIGH UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/ ROUTING PAN PAN FUNCTION MIDI Sampler LO-MID G FADER MODE EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O AUX 1 AUX 2 REMOTE AUX 3 CLIP –3 –6 –9 –12 –15 –18 –24 –30 –36 –42 –48 HI-MID F F MEMORY G 1 RETURN 2 LOW SELECTED CHANNEL AUX 4 HOME 1 MEMORY CARD CD-ROM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13/14 15/16 17 SEL 18 SEL 19 SEL 20 SEL 21 SEL 22 SEL 23 SEL 24 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STEREO MASTER SEL 1 RETURN 2 SEL SOLO ON ON ON SEL SOLO SOLO ON –1/DEC MEMORY +1/INC PARAMETER 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 –10 –5 –15 5 5 10 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 10 20 20 5 5 10 10 20 20 –40 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ –70 –∞ –20 CURSOR –30 –50 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ 40 60 ∞ ENTER MIDI controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13/14 15/16 STEREO MASTER SREV1—Owner’s Manual Wordclocks 73 Wordclocks 8 In this chapter... Wordclocks & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wordclock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Wordclock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wordclock Hookup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 74 75 78 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 74 Chapter 8—Wordclocks Wordclocks & the SREV1 Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another, otherwise, signals may not be received correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchronization is achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchronizing all the digital audio signals in a system. Note that wordclocks are not the same as SMPTE/EBU timecode or MIDI timecode, which are typically used to synchronize tape machines, MIDI sequencers, and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization of the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables, typically BNC cables, or derived from digital audio connections, such as AES/EBU. If you’re connecting to the SREV1 using only analog inputs and outputs, no special wordclock settings are required, and the SREV1 can be set to use its own internally generated wordclock. If you’re connecting other equipment digitally, however, you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves. The SREV1 can be used as a 48 kHz wordclock master, or slaved to an external wordclock source of 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. It can receive an external wordclock signal via an AES/EBU input, SLOT input, or the BNC WORD CLOCK IN connector. In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices be turned on even if they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master first, and then the slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves first, and then the master. Before use, make sure that the wordclock slaves are correctly locked to the wordclock master. Most devices have front panel indicators, similar to the FS LOCK indicators on the SREV1, to show when they are wordclock locked. Refer to the relevant owner’s manuals for more information. When the wordclock source is changed, lower the volume of your system just in case a device becomes unlocked and outputs any unpleasant noises. Wordclock Connections The WORD CLOCK IN BNC connector is used to receive wordclock signals from other digital audio equipment. When the wordclock source is set to WCLK IN, the SREV1 locks to the wordclock signal received at the WORD CLOCK IN connector. See “Wordclock Hookup Examples” on page 78 for more information. The WORD CLOCK IN is auto-terminating. SREV1—Owner’s Manual WORD CLOCK IN An external wordclock can also be sourced from an AES/EBU input or the slot input of a digital I/O card. Selecting the Wordclock Source 75 Selecting the Wordclock Source Note: When the wordclock source is changed on the wordclock master device, noise may occur from the SREV1’s outputs, especially if an MY8-AT I/O card is installed, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise any connected speakers may be damaged. 1 Use the [UTILITY] button to locate the DIO page shown below. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select a source. The button for the currently selected source appears highlighted. The following wordclock sources can be selected. Condition Source Description Always available INT 48K Internal 48 kHz wordclock (default setting) WCLK IN External wordclock via the BNC WORD CLOCK IN AES/EBU1 External wordclock via the AES/EBU IN 1 AES/EBU2 External wordclock via the AES/EBU IN 2 SLOT x 1/2 External wordclock via slot x, input pair 1/2 SLOT x 3/4 External wordclock via slot x, input pair 3/4 SLOT x 5/6 External wordclock via slot x, input pair 5/6 SLOT x 7/8 External wordclock via slot x, input pair 7/8 SLOT x External wordclock via slot x When lockable external wordclock present AES/EBU I/O card installed (MY8-AE) & lockable wordclock present ADAT or Tascam I/O card installed (MY8-AT, MY8-TD) & lockable wordclock present This button indicates that a wordclock signal is present and that it’s at the same frequency as the currently selected source. This source can be selected. This button indicates that although a wordclock signal is present, it’s not at the same frequency as the currently selected source. This source can be selected. This button indicates that no wordclock signal is present. This source cannot be selected. The button of the selected source appears highlighted, as shown here. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 76 Chapter 8—Wordclocks 3 Press the [ENTER] button to activate the selected source. The SREV1 checks the selected source to see if a usable wordclock signal is available. If such a signal exists, the SREV1 locks to it and the corresponding FS LOCK indicator, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, lights up. If a usable wordclock signal is not found, the SREV1 will not operate and the FS LOCK indicators flash, as shown in the following table. In this situation, you must select another wordclock source or correct the external wordclock source. This condition also occurs if a previously selected external wordclock source is disconnected, the device supplying it is turned off, or the external wordclock is neither 48 kHz nor 44.1 kHz. The following table shows the indicator status when the SREV1 is synced and locked to its internal wordclock or an external source. Wordclock Source Button Condition FS LOCK Indicators RC-SREV1 FS Status Indicator FS LOCK Internal wordclock 48K Lock = yes Sync = yes 44.1K FS LOCK External wordclock 48K Lock = yes Sync = yes 44.1K The following table outlines each step in the transition from wordclock unlock to lock. Step Condition Wordclock Source Button FS LOCK Indicators RC-SREV1 FS Status Indicator Notes FS LOCK 1 Lock = no Sync = no 48K 44.1K External source not connected, etc., SREV1 muted Flashing together FS LOCK 2 Lock = yes Sync = no 48K 44.1K Alternate flashing FS LOCK 3 Lock = yes Sync = no 48K 44.1K FS LOCK 4 Lock = yes Sync = yes 48K 44.1K About 0.5–1 second after external source connected, SREV1 locked, but still muted After about 0.5–1 second, the wordclock frequency is established and the SREV1 unmuted After about 2–3 seconds, synchronization is established and the SREV1 is ready for use If the external wordclock frequency is neither 44.1 kHz nor 48 kHz (for example, it’s 32 kHz), the transition from unlock to lock will stop at step 2 and the SREV1 outputs will remain muted. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Selecting the Wordclock Source 77 The following table outlines each step in the transition from wordclock lock to unlock. Step Condition Wordclock Source Button FS LOCK Indicators RC-SREV1 FS Status Indicator Notes FS LOCK 1 Lock = yes Sync = yes 48K Normal condition 44.1K FS LOCK 2 Lock = no Sync = no 48K 44.1K External source disconnected, etc., SREV1 muted Flashing together The INT 48K and WCLK IN buttons do not indicate whether or not the wordclock is locked or synchronized and never appear with diagonal lines through them. You can check the lock status of these sources by using the SREV1’s FS LOCK indicator, or the RC-SREV1’s FS status indicator. If a previously selected wordclock source is no longer available, for example, when an I/O card is removed, the wordclock source button appears shaded. In this case, select another wordclock source in order to use the SREV1. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 78 Chapter 8—Wordclocks Wordclock Hookup Examples The following diagram shows the three different ways in which an external wordclock can be fed to the SREV1: AES/EBU input, slot input, or WORD CLOCK IN. 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 DIGITAL (AES/EBU) IN SREV1 Wordclock source POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD Digital Mixer WC source setting: AES/EBU 1 DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE SLOT 1 AES/EBU 2 DIGITAL I/O CARD MODEL MY8-AE SREV1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON Wordclock Master OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD WC source setting: SLOT1 1/2 Digital Multitrack Recorder TIME DISPLAY CAPTURE ABS/REL REMAIN OVER OVER –dB 0 0 –dB 2 2 6 6 10 12 12 14 20 ABS H M S 00 00 00 00 DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER POWER F YAMAHA D24 VARI SPEED UTILITY SETUP V. TRACK SELECT EDIT UNDO/ REDO 20 18 30 20 42 30 42 60 26 60 READY LOCK READY L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WC INT 24 BIT FS 48K TC MASTER ON R 8 7 8 9 PROJECT SELECT 4 5 6 LOC MEM RECALL PROJECT SEARCH LAST REC OUT IN RTN TO ZERO ROLL BACK A REW FF JOG ON SET OFF AUTO PUNCH RECORD READY 3 REPEAT A B B REHE 0 10 PHONES LEVEL SOLO/ SELECT WORD CLOCK IN PEAK HOLD AUTO INPUT ALL INPUT FORMAT 1 2 3 0/- CANCEL ENTER LOC MEM STORE STOP PLAY REC CHASE LOCATE PHONES MONITOR SELECT SREV1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 FS LOCK OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON MEMORY CARD WC source setting: WCLK IN SREV1—Owner’s Manual CD-ROM OFF JOG/DATA SHUTTLE/ CURSOR Wordclock Hookup Examples 79 The following diagram shows how a wordclock signal can be distributed by using coaxial BNC cables in a multiple-SREV1 system. WORD CLOCK IN SREV1 #1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 FS LOCK OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD SERIAL 2 WC source setting: WCLK IN Serial cable SREV1 #2 WORD CLOCK IN SERIAL 1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 FS LOCK OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD SERIAL 2 WC source setting: WCLK IN Serial cable SREV1 #3 WORD CLOCK IN Wordclock Master SERIAL 1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON OFF CD-ROM MEMORY CARD SERIAL 2 WC source setting: WCLK IN WORD CLOCK IN Serial cable SREV1 #4 SERIAL 1 POWER INPUT 1 2 3 OUTPUT 4 CLIP CH SIGNAL FS LOCK 48K 1 2 3 4 44.1K ON MEMORY CARD OFF CD-ROM WC source setting: WCLK IN SREV1—Owner’s Manual I/O Options 81 I/O Options 9 In this chapter... I/O Options & the SREV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 82 83 84 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 82 Chapter 9—I/O Options I/O Options & the SREV1 In addition to the two AES/EBU inputs and outputs, the SREV1 features two mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) slots for use with optional I/O cards, which offer several analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. The Yamaha AW4416 Audio Workstation, 01V Digital Mixing Console, D24 Digital Multitrack Recorder, DME32 Digital Mixing Engine, AD824 AD Converter, and DA824 DA Converter also use mini YGDAI I/O cards. Note that the “CD” series of YGDAI cards used by the Yamaha 02R Digital Recording Console and 03D Digital Mixing Console are not interchangeable with mini YGDAI cards. Slot inputs can be freely assigned to SREV1 channels. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. Channel-to-slot output assignments are fixed. See “Output Assignments” on page 9 for more information. Available I/O Cards The following mini YGDAI cards are currently available. See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on mini YGDAI cards: <http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>. MY8-AD: 8 Analog Inputs The MY8-AD card provides eight electronically balanced analog inputs via phone jack connectors, with 20-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters. MY4-AD: 4 Analog Inputs The MY4-AD card provides four electronically balanced analog inputs via female XLR connectors, with 24-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters. MY4-DA: 4 Analog Outputs The MY4-DA card provides four electronically balanced analog outputs via male XLR connectors, with 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters. MY8-AT: ADAT The MY8-AT card provides ADAT format digital I/O via two MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface connectors, and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths. MY8-AE: AES/EBU The MY8-AE card provides AES/EBU format digital I/O via a 25-pin D-sub connector, and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths. MY8-TD: Tascam The MY8-TD card provides Tascam format digital I/O via a 25-pin D-sub connector, and supports 16-, 20-, and 24-bit wordlengths. A BNC connector is provided for wordclock output. MY8-TD cards feature a device selector switch (EXT: 88/INT: 38) that should be set to match the device being connected. This should be set to “EXT: 88” when connecting a Tascam DA-88, or “INT: 38” when connecting a Tascam DA-38 or other digital audio device. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Choosing I/O Cards 83 Specifications for the currently available I/O cards are as follows. Card Format In Out A/D D/A Wordlength Connectors MY8-AD Analog input 8 — 20-bit, 128 times — — Phone jack (balanced) x8 MY4-AD Analog input 4 — 24-bit, 128 times — — XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4 MY4-DA Analog output — 4 — 20-bit, 128 times — XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4 MY8-AT ADAT 8 8 — — 16, 20, 24 Optical x2 MY8-AE AES/EBU 8 8 — — 16, 20, 24 25-pin D-sub (cable not included) MY8-TD Tascam 8 8 — — 16, 20, 24 25-pin D-sub BNC wordclock output As these specifications show, analog I/O cards offer either inputs or outputs, while digital I/O cards offer both inputs and outputs. When an I/O card not listed above, for example, a future addition to the mini YGDAI series, is installed, the message “UNKNOWN CARD” appears. Choosing I/O Cards For analog I/O with XLR-type connectors, an MY4-AD card could be installed in, say, SLOT 1, and an MY4-DA card in SLOT 2, although it makes no difference which card is installed in each slot. To connect the SREV1 to other digital audio equipment, you must determine which digital interconnect format—AES/EBU, ADAT, or Tascam—the other equipment supports, and then install the necessary I/O cards. The following table shows which cards to use when connecting the SREV1 to other Yamaha digital audio products. Each product can be connected by using the AES/EBU, ADAT, or Tascam interface format. Unit AW4416 Max. # of Cards 2 Format Card for Other Unit Card for SREV1 ADAT MY8-AT MY8-AT Tascam MY8-TD MY8-TD AES/EBU MY8-AE MY8-AE AD824 1 As above DA824 1 As above DME32 4 As above D24 4 As above 01V 1 As above 02R 4 single or 2 double 03D 1 ADAT CD8-AT MY8-AT Tascam CD8-TDII MY8-TD AES/EBU CD8-AE or CD8-AE-S MY8-AE As above An external wordclock can be sourced via digital I/O cards. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. Using ADAT I/O cards in certain devices can cause wordclock-lock problems, so it’s recommend that you source wordclock signals via I/O cards of another format. See your Yamaha dealer for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 84 Chapter 9—I/O Options Installing I/O Cards This section explains how to install mini YGDAI cards in the SREV1. 1 Turn off the SREV1. 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below. AC IN SL O 1 T SL O 2 T 2 1 3 1 2 1 3 2 2 OU T 2 3 DIG ITA L (A ES /EB U) 1 1 2 3 OU T 1 MID I IN IN 2 SE RIA L 1 RE MO TE WO RD CL OC K IN Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use. 3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot, as shown below. You may have to push firmly to plug the card into the SREV1 connector. AC IN SL O 1 T SL O 2 T 2 1 3 1 2 1 3 2 2 OU T 2 3 DIG ITA L (A ES /EB U) 1 1 2 3 IN 1 OU T MID I IN 2 SE RIA L 1 RE MO TE WO RD CL OC K 4 IN Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Do not leave the thumbscrews loose, as the card will not be grounded correctly. You can check the type of I/O card installed in each slot, and assign slot inputs to channels on the DIO page. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting 85 Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot turn on the SREV1. Advice Make sure that the power cord is connected properly to a suitable AC wall outlet and the SREV1. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 26 for more information. Make sure that the SREV1 POWER switch is set to ON. See “Turning On & Off the SREV1” on page 26 for more information. If you still cannot turn on the SREV1, contact your Yamaha dealer. The POWER indicator lights up when the SREV1 is turned on, but the INPUT and OUTPUT indicators flash alternately. Cannot turn on the RC-SREV1. Contact your Yamaha dealer. Make sure that the remote cable is connected between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 properly. See “Connecting the RC-SREV1 Remote Controller” on page 22. Make sure that the RC-SREV1 POWER switch is in the ON position. See “Turning On & Off the RC-SREV1” on page 26 for more information. The FS LOCK indicators flash alternately. The SREV1 is locked but not synchronized to the external wordclock source. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. The FS LOCK indicators flash together. The SREV1 is neither locked nor synchronized to the external wordclock source. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. The FS status section of the RC-SREV1 display shows “UNLOCK”. The SREV1 is neither locked nor synchronized to the external wordclock source. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 75 for more information. If you’re using slot inputs, make sure the I/O cards are installed properly and secured using the thumbscrews. See “Installing I/O Cards” on page 84. Make sure the input is assigned to the proper channel. See “Assigning Inputs” on page 35 for more information. Connected an input signal but there’s no output. Use the level meters to help trace the signal. See “Metering” on page 37 for more information. Check the channel’s input and output level settings. See “Setting Input & Output Levels” on page 36 for more information. Is the Bypass mode is set to REV-MUTE, the reverb balance set to 100%, and the reverb level set to –∞? Are you connected to the correct outputs? See “Output Assignments” on page 9 for more information. Is the SREV1 bypassed. See “Bypassing the SREV1” on page 40 for more information. Can’t hear any reverb. Make sure that the Reverb Balance parameter is not set to 0%. See “Main 2 Parameters” on page 54 and “Fine Reverb Parameters” on page 56 for more information. Make sure that the Reverb Level parameter is not set to 0 dB. See “Fine Reverb Parameters” on page 56 for more information. Recalled a program but only its title is displayed, no program number. Probably because the program was recalled from a drive. Program numbers (P01–P12) are displayed only when programs are recalled from the Quick memories. See “RC-SREV1 Display” on page 18 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 86 Troubleshooting Symptom Advice Cannot store a Quick memory program. Is the selected Quick memory write-protected? See “Protecting Quick Memory Programs” on page 44 for more information. Cannot list the programs, projects, or impulse response data files on a PC Card. Make sure the PC Card is fully inserted. See “Using PC Cards” on page 29 for more information. Cannot list the programs, projects, or impulse response data files on a CD-ROM. Make sure the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. See “Using CD-ROMs” on page 28 for more information. A program is being recalled unknowingly. Is the program assigned to a MIDI Program Change and being recalled by external MIDI messages? See “Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes” on page 70. A parameter is being adjusted unknowingly. Is the parameter assigned to a MIDI Control Change and responding to external MIDI messages? See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71. Check the MIDI connections. Cannot receive MIDI messages. Make sure the connected MIDI device is turned on and set to transmit on the correct MIDI Channels. Check the MIDI settings on the RC-SREV1. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69. MIDI Program Change messages do not recall programs. MIDI Control Change messages do not control parameters. Make sure that the SREV1 is set to receive Program Change messages on the correct channel. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69. Check that the Program Change being transmitted is assigned to a Quick memory program. See “Assigning Quick Memory Programs to Program Changes” on page 70. Make sure that the SREV1 is set to receive Control Change messages on the correct channel. See “Setting the MIDI Receive Channels” on page 69. Check that the Control Change being transmitted is assigned to a parameter. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71. Several parameters are adjusted when a Control Change message is received. If a Control Change is assigned to more than one parameter, all of those parameters are adjusted when that Control Change is received. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 71 for more information. Noise occurs from the outputs when the wordclock is changed on the wordclock master device. This is normal, although it’s more likely to occur if an MY8-AT I/O card is installed. To eliminate the risk of speaker damage, turn down your power amps beforehand. Cannot eject a CD-ROM. Use the emergency disc eject hole. See “SREV1 Front Panel” on page 12 for more information. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Error Messages 87 Appendix Error Messages Message Reason Solution VERSION MISMATCH. PUSH ANY KEY TO DOWNLOAD. The software versions of the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 do not match. Press any button to download the necessary software from the SREV1 to the RC-SREV1 in order to match the software versions. COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT. Communication with the SREV1 failed. Turn off both the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 and check the remote cable connections, also check for breaks in the cable. WRITE PROTECTED. A write protected Quick memory, program, or project was selected. Turn off the protection in order to store or edit the title. The CD-ROM is always write protected. INSERT MEDIA. No media inserted. Insert the necessary media. Note that it takes the SREV1 between 20 and 30 seconds to recognize CD-ROMs. TITLE IS EMPTY! No title has been entered or only spaces. Enter some characters for the title. !!! LOW BATTERY !!! The SREV1’s internal backup battery is getting low. !!! NO BATTERY !!! RESTORED FROM BACKUP. The SREV1’s internal backup battery is flat and the contents of the batAsk your Yamaha dealer to change the battery-backed memory were lost. The contery as soon as possible. tents were restored from the backup file on the Internal card. DATA FILE NOT FOUND! INSERT PCMCIA CARD. When the SREV1 was restarted, the Reverb mode changed, or a project loaded, the programs were loaded from the PC Card but the necessary impulse-response data could not be found. Insert the PC Card containing the necessary impulse-response data. DATA FILE NOT FOUND! INSERT CD-ROM DISC. When the SREV1 was restarted, the Reverb mode changed, or a project loaded, the programs were loaded from the CD-ROM but the necessary impulse-response data could not be found. Insert the CD-ROM containing the necessary impulse-response data. EMPTY DATA! SOME DATA ISN’T LOADED. CAN’T SAVE THIS PROGRAM. The impulse-response data for the program was not loaded. Load the necessary impulse-response data, or load the program again. NO SUFFICIENT SPACE! CAN’T SAVE THIS PROGRAM. The program cannot be stored due to lack of space on the PC Card or Internal card. Insert another PC Card, or delete some unnecessary programs in order to free some space. DESTINATION WRITE PROTECTED! You tried to edit the title of a program or Use another title, or turn off the write proproject on the Library page, but the destection. tination file is write protected. COULD NOT COMMUNICATE WITH SREV1. CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTION AND SREV1’S POWER, THEN TURN ON RC-SREV1 AGAIN. Communication between the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 failed during startup. Ask your Yamaha dealer to change the battery as soon as possible. If the RC-SREV1 is powered by an optional AC adapter, make sure that the SREV1 is turned on. Turn off both the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 and check the remote cable connections, also check for breaks in the cable. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 88 Appendix Confirmation Messages Message Condition Solution CURRENT IS EDITED. RECALL PROGRAM OK? Appears when you recall a program from the Quick memory page, but the current program contains unsaved changes. To discard the current program’s unsaved changes and recall the program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. CURRENT IS EDITED, LOAD LIBRARY OK? Appears when you recall a program from the Library page, but the current program contains unsaved changes. To discard the current program’s unsaved changes and load the program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. Appears when you save the current program on the Library page, but a program with the same title already exists. To save and overwrite the existing program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. Appears when you edit the title of the selected program on the Library page, but a program with the same title already exists. To overwrite the existing program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. DELETE LIBRARY OK? Appears when you delete the selected program on the Library page. Press OK to delete the selected program. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. CURRENT IS EDITED. LOAD PROJECT OK? Appears when you recall a project from the Project page, but the current program contains unsaved changes. To discard the current program’s unsaved changes and load the project, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. Appears when you save a project on the Project page, but a program with the same title already exists. To save and overwrite the existing program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. Appears when you edit the title of the selected project on the Project page, but a program with the same title already exists. To save and overwrite the existing program, press OK. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. DELETE PROJECT OK? Appears when you delete the selected project on the Project page. Press OK to delete the selected program. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. LOAD DATA OK? Appears when you load the selected impulse-response data from the Data Load page. Press OK to load the selected impulse-response data. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. CHANGE REV MODE OK? Appears when you select a different Reverb mode on the Setup page. Press OK to switch to the Reverb mode. To cancel the operation, press CANCEL. SAME LIBRARY EXISTS! OVERWRITE OK? SAME PROJECT EXISTS! OVERWRITE OK? SREV1—Owner’s Manual General Messages 89 General Messages Message Meaning INITIALIZING... The RC-SREV1’s internal information is being updated. SETTING REV MODE... The Reverb mode is being changed. RECALLING PROGRAM... A Quick memory program is being recalled on the Program page. STORING PROGRAM... The current program is being stored to the selected Quick memory. LOADING LIBRARY... The selected program is being loaded on the Library page. SAVING LIBRARY... The current program is being saved on the Library page. CHANGING TITLE... The title of the selected program is being changed on the Library page. DELETING LIBRARY... The selected program is being deleted on the Library page. CHANGING PROTECT MODE... The protection setting of the selected program is being changed on the Library page. DOWNLOADING FILE LIST... The program list is being downloaded from the selected drive on the Library page. LOADING DATA... The selected impulse-response data is being loaded on the Data Load page. DOWNLOADING FILE LIST... The impulse-response data list is being downloaded from the selected drive on the Library page. LOADING PROJECT... The selected project is being loaded on the Project page. SAVING PROJECT... The selected project is being saved on the Project page. CHANGING TITLE... The title of the selected project is being changed on the Project page. DELETING PROJECT... The selected project is being deleted on the Project page. CHANGING PROTECT MODE... The protection setting of the selected project is being changed on the Project page. DOWNLOADING FILE LIST... The project list is being downloaded from the selected drive on the Project page. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 90 Appendix General Specifications Sampling rate Internal 48 kHz External 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz Internal processing Program Memories 32 bit 2-channel, 4-channel mode 6 (P01–P06) 2-channel x2 mode 12 (P01–P12) INPUT SIGNAL x4 (–34 dB), CLIP x4 OUTPUT SIGNAL x4 (–34 dB), CLIP x4 FS LOCK 48K, 44.1K Others POWER, PC Card, CD-ROM Indicators PC Card slot PCMCIA (Type II), PC Card ATA spec, FAT16 CD-ROM drive ISO9660 Level 2 format Cooling fan x2 Power requirements U.S.A. & Canada 120 V AC, 60 Hz Europe 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 120 W Dimensions (W × H × D) 480 × 141.7 × 451.8 mm (18.9 x 5.6 x 17.8 inches) Weight 11.5 kg (25.3 lbs) Free-air operating temperature 5˚ C to 40˚ C (41˚ F to 104˚ F) Power cord length 2.5 m Supplied accessories Power cord, CD-ROM (Reverb programs, data), Owner’s Manual Options RC-SREV1, DB-SREV1, MY8-AD, MY4-AD, MY4-DA, MY8-AT, MY8-AE, MY8-TD SREV1—Owner’s Manual Digital Input Specifications 91 Digital Input Specifications Connection DIGITAL IN 1, 2 Format Data Length Level Connector AES/EBU 24 bit RS-422 XLR-3-31 type1 1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). Digital Output Specifications Connection DIGITAL OUT 1, 2 Format Data Length Level Connector AES/EBU1 24 bit RS-422 XLR-3-32 type2 1. Channel status: Type: 2 audio channels. Sampling rate: depends on internal configuration. 2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). Control I/O Specifications Connection Format Level Connector — RS-422 8-pin mini DIN MIDI IN MIDI — 5-pin DIN MIDI OUT MIDI — 5-pin DIN WORD CLOCK IN — TTL 75Ω BNC REMOTE — RS-422 9-pin D-sub (female) mini YGDAI — — SERIAL 1, 2 SLOT (x2) Remote Cable Wiring Diagram SREV1 9-pin D-sub (male) RC-SREV1 NC RX– TX+ NC +12V NC RX+ TX– GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NC TX– RX+ NC +12V NC TX+ RX– GND 9-pin D-sub (female) Note that if the resistance of the +12V or GND line between the two connectors is more than 1.5Ω, the optional Yamaha PA-6 AC adapter should be used to power the RC-SREV1. Note also that the screws used to secure the D-sub connectors to the SREV1 and RC-SREV1 must be metric. Readily available D-sub connectors typically come with securing screws with an imperial thread, which cannot be used. The securing screws on the D-sub connectors on the supplied remote cable are metric. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 92 Appendix 43.5 362.5 451.8 440 34 11.8 Dimensions 21.5 21.5 437 9.7 141.7 132 480 81 318 81 Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice. For European Model Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Inrush Current: 70A Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4 SREV1—Owner’s Manual Units: mm Glossary 93 Glossary 2-channel mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as a stereo processor. 4-channel mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as a 4-channel surround processor. 2-channel x2 mode—In this mode the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo processors (A and B). ADAT interconnect format—The digital audio interconnect format typically found on ADAT-compatible digital audio equipment. Eight channels of digital audio are carried per fiber-optic connection using Toslink connectors. AES/EBU interconnect format—The digital audio interconnect format, established by the AES (Audio Engineering Society) and EBU (European Broadcasting Union), for transferring digital audio data between professional digital audio equipment. Two channels of digital audio (left/odd and right/even) are carried per balanced line. CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read Only Memory)— The compact disc format for data storage. Defined in the Yellow Book. Control Change—A type of MIDI message offering real-time parameter control. Typical Control Changes include Modulation, Volume, Pan, and Portamento. Convolution—The digital audio process of imposing the characteristics of one signal onto another signal. The SREV1 convolves an acoustic “fingerprint” of a previously measured environment onto an audio signal, faithfully recreating the original reverberation, with accurate reflection detail identical to that produced had the sound been heard in that environment. Convolution time—Convolution time is not the same as reverb time. Reverb time is the time it takes the reverberation to decay by –60 dB, and more convolution is required to provide reverberation down to –90 dB or –120 dB, so the convolution time must be between 1.5 and 2 times more than the reverb time. DIO—Abbreviation for “digital input and output.” Drives—Programs, projects, and impulse-response data can be stored on the following drives: Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM. (The Internal Card is compact flash memory.) FAT16—The FAT (File Allocation Table) system, developed by Microsoft and supported by MS-DOS and most Windows operating systems, is essentially a database that records where files are stored on hard disks and other storage media. FAT12 is the original 12-bit version. FAT16 is the 16-bit version, since superseded by the 32-bit version, FAT32, which supports larger storage devices. FS—Abbreviation for “sampling frequency.” Impulse response—The sound pressure measured at a sensor position set against the time of an acoustic pulse “fired” from the source position. In other words, an environment’s acoustical response. Initial delay—The delay before the reverb reflections start. ISO9660 Level 2—A standard format for storing files and directories on a CD-ROM. Conforming discs can be read by Macintosh, Windows, UNIX, and other systems. Library—The place used to load, save, title, protect, and delete programs from the Internal Card, PC Card, and CD-ROM. MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface)—The standard digital interface for controlling electronic musical systems and audio equipment. SREV1—Owner’s Manual 94 Glossary mini YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface)—The second-generation YGDAI interface system used on the 01V Digital Mixing Console, D24 Digital Multitrack Recorder, DME32 Digital Mixing Engine, and SREV1. PC Card—A small, credit card-sized device for use with personal computers and other electronic devices. PC Cards come in three thicknesses, the thinnest being Type I, which is typically used for RAM or ROM memory. Type II cards, which are slightly thicker, may contain, for example, a fax/modem, while Type III cards are thick enough to contain a hard disk drive. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association)—The organization responsible for the development of the PC Card standard. Peaking—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost a band of frequencies, producing a mountain-peak type response. The width of the band is called the Q. Middle-band EQ is usually of the peaking type. Compare with Shelving. PEQ—Abbreviation for “parametric EQ.” Program—Measured impulse response data is combined with variable parameters such as reverb time and initial delay to form reverb programs. Preset programs are supplied on CD-ROM. User programs can be stored in the Quick memories, Internal Card or PC Card. Program Change—A type of MIDI message for recalling programs. Project—A Project contains all the Quick memory programs and the current program settings. Projects can be stored on the Internal Card or PC Card. Q—The unit used to express a filter’s width. High values imply a narrow frequency band, low values, a wide frequency band. Quick memory—Quick memories are special memories for storing programs. Unlike programs stored on the Internal Card, PC Card, or CD-ROM, which take time to load, Quick memory programs can be recalled instantly. Reverb mode—The SREV1 offers three modes of operation: 2-channel, 4-channel, and 2-channel x2. In 2-channel mode, the SREV1 functions as a stereo processor. In 4-channel mode, the SREV1 offers 4-channel surround processing. In 2-channel x2 mode, the SREV1 functions as two independent stereo processors (A and B). Reverb time—The time it takes the reverberation to decay by –60 dB. See also Convolution time. RS-232C—An interface for connecting serial devices, offering a transmission distance of approximately 15 meters, typically using 9- or 25-pin D-Sub connectors. RS-422—A balanced interface for connecting serial devices, offering a transmission distance of approximately 1 kilometer, higher data rates, and greater immunity to interference than RS-232C. Shelving—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost frequencies above or below a set frequency. It produces a shelf-looking response curve. High and low EQs are usually of the shelving type. Contrast with Peaking. Tascam TDIF-1 interconnect format—The Tascam Digital InterFace audio interconnect format typically found on Tascam TDIF-1-compatible digital audio equipment. TDIF-1 is a bidirectional, 8-channel format, which uses 25-pin D-sub connectors. Wordclock—A clock signal used to synchronize the data processing circuits of devices digital audio equipment. YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface)—Yamaha digital audio interface system offering a range of analog and digital input and output options for Yamaha digital audio equipment, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam DIO. SREV1—Owner’s Manual Index Index Symbols –1/DEC button 17 +1/INC button 17 Numerics 2CH file types 9 2-channel mode analog hookup example 24 convolution time 6 definition 93 digital hookup example 23 file types 9 I/O configurations 6 output assignments 9 selecting 34 2-channel x2 mode analog hookup example 25 convolution time 6 definition 93 digital hookup example 23 file types 9 I/O configurations 6 output assignments 9 selecting 34 2X2 file types 9 4CH file types 9 4-channel mode analog hookup example 25 convolution time 6 definition 93 digital hookup example 23 file types 9 I/O configurations 6 output assignments 9 selecting 34 A AC adapter cable clip 20 using 27 AC IN connector about 14 using 26 Activity indicator CD-ROM 13 PC Card 12 ADAT format definition 93 I/O cards 82 AES/EBU format definition 93 I/O cards 82 AES/EBU IN assigning 35 hookup examples 23 AES/EBU OUT channel assignments 9 hookup examples 23 AIFF file types 9 Air inlet 12 Analog hookup examples 24 Analog I/O 82 Arrow buttons 17 Assigning inputs 35 parameters to Control Changes 71 quick memory programs to Program Changes 70 ATA card, see PC Card B Block diagram 10 BRIGHT control about 20 using 27 Brightness, RC-SREV1 display 27 Bypass mode setting 40 status 18 using 40 BYPASS button & indicator about 16 using 40 C Cable clip 20 Caps lock Cautions ii CD-ROM definition 93 drive 13 Emergency disc eject hole 13 handling iii loading impulse-response data 61 loading programs 45 loading projects 48 operation diagram 8 using 28 CLIP indicator RC-SREV1 17 SREV1 12 CompactFlash 29 95 Configurations, I/O 6 Connecting external wordclock 74 hookup examples 23 MIDI 68 multiple SREV1s 64 power cord 26 RC-SREV1 22 Connection examples 23 CONT control about 20 using 27 Contrast, RC-SREV1 display 27 Control Changes assigning parameters 71 definition 93 Convolution available times 6 definition 93 Cooling fans 14 Cursor buttons 17 D Data load page 61 DATA wheel 17 DB-SREV1 DSP Expansion Board 6 DC 12V IN connector 20 using 27 DEC button 17 Deleting library programs 47 projects 50 Dial, PARAMETER wheel 17 DIGITAL (AES/EBU) IN 14 DIGITAL (AES/EBU) OUT 14 Digital hookup examples 23 DIO page 75 Direct-out, bypass mode 40 Display about 18 brightness 27 contrast 27 Drives about 8 definition 93 loading programs 45 loading projects 48 operation diagram 8 saving programs 46 saving projects 49 E Edit buffer operation diagram 8 Edit status indicator 18 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 96 Index Editing fine post EQ parameters 59 fine pre EQ parameters 57 fine reverb parameters 56 library program titles 46 Main 1 parameters 52 Main 2 parameters 54 programs 51 project titles 49 quick memory program titles 43 Eject button CD-ROM 13 PC Card 12 Ejecting CD-ROM 28 PC Card 29 Emergency disc eject hole 13 ENTER button 17 EQ post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Extensions, SREV1 files 9 External wordclock 75 F Fader status 19 FAT16 definition 93 PC Cards 29 Files types 9 Fine parameters post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 reverb 56 Frequency post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 wordclock 75 Front panel 12 FS LOCK indicators 12 FS status 18 FS, definition 93 G Gain post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Getting started 21 Grounding screw 14 H H.shelf post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 High post EQ 59 SREV1—Owner’s Manual pre EQ 57 High EQ fine editing 57 Main 1, grouped 52 High-mid EQ 59 Home page on the web iv Hookup examples analog & digital I/O 23 multiple SREV1s 64 wordclock 78 HPF Main 2, grouped 54 post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Installing I/O cards 84 Internal Card loading impulse-response data 61 loading programs 45 loading projects 48 operation diagram 8 saving programs 46 saving projects 49 Internal wordclock 75 Internet web site iv ISO9660 CD-ROM 28 definition 93 I L I/O cards about 82 available 82 choosing 83 hookup example 24 installing 84 specifications 83 wordclock source 75 Impulse-response data about 6 definition 93 loading 61 INC button 17 Indicators BYPASS 16 CD-ROM activity 13 FS LOCK 12 INPUT 12 INPUT CLIP 17 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT CLIP 17 PC Card activity 12 POWER 12 Initial delay fine editing 56 Main 1, grouped 52 INPUT CLIP indicator RC-SREV1 17 SREV1 12 Input level fine setting 36 Main 1, grouped 54 Input/output configurations 6 Inputs assigning 35 DIGITAL AES/EBU IN 14 I/O cards 82 setting levels 36 Inserting CD-ROM 28 PC Card 29 L.shelf post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 LCD brightness & contrast 27 Levels, setting 36 Library about 8 deleting library programs 47 editing library program titles 46 loading programs 45 operation diagram 8 protecting programs 47 saving programs 46 saving projects 49 working with 45 Library page 45 Loading impulse-response data 61 programs from the library 45 projects 48 Lock, wordclock 75 Low post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Low EQ fine editing 57 Main 1, grouped 52 Lowercase, titling Low-mid EQ 59 LPF post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 M Main 1 page 52 parameter editing 52 Main 2 page 54 parameter editing 54 Index Main page area 18 Mains lead 26 MEMORY CARD slot about 12 using 29 Memory Stick 29 Meter I/O page 36, 38, 39, 40 Meter mode, setting 39 Meters about 18 mode setting 39 peak hold 39 using 37 Microdrive 29 MIDI about 68 assigning parameters to Control Changes 71 assigning quick memory programs to Program Changes 70 definition 93 implementation chart 99 IN & OUT ports, about 15 MIDI IN port 68 MIDI OUT port 68 receive channels 69 MIDI page 69 mini YGDAI card specifications 83 cards 82 definition 94 Modes, see Reverb modes Motorized faders 17 Multiple SREV1s about 64 hookup examples 64 operating notes 65 selecting 65 serial connectors 64 MY cards 82 N Naming, see titling O OUTPUT CLIP indicator RC-SREV1 17 SREV1 12 Output level fine setting 36 Main 2, grouped 54 Outputs assignments 9 DIGITAL AES/EBU OUT 14 I/O cards 82 setting levels 36 Owner’s manual about v conventions used v P PA-6, optional AC adapter 27 Page tabs 18 Page title 18 PARAMETER FINE button 16 PARAMETER MAIN button 16 Parameters 9 PC Card definition 94 handling iii loading impulse-response data 61 loading programs 45 loading projects 48 operation diagram 8 saving programs 46 saving projects 49 using 29 PCMCIA definition 94 See also PC Card Peak hold, using 39 Peaking definition 94 post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 PEQ, definition 94 Ports MIDI 15 REMOTE 15 SERIAL 15 Post EQ 59 Post EQ page 59 Power cord 26 POWER switch (RC-SREV1) about 20 using 26 POWER switch (SREV1) about 12 using 26 Powering up the RC-SREV1 26 Powering up the SREV1 26 Pre EQ 57 Pre EQ page 57 PROGRAM button 16 Program Changes assigning quick memory programs 70 definition 94 Program number & title 18 Program page 42 Programs 97 about 7 assigning Program Changes 70 definition 94 deleting library programs 47 editing 51 editing library program titles 46 editing quick memory program titles 43 loading from the library 45 parameters 9 protecting library programs 47 protecting quick memory programs 44 recalling from quick memories 42 saving in the library 46 storing in quick memories 43 Project page 48 Projects about 7 deleting 50 editing project titles 49 loading 48 protecting projects 50 saving 49 working with 48 Protecting library programs 47 projects 50 quick memory programs 44 Q Q definition 94 post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Quick memories about 7 assigning Program Changes 70 definition 94 recalling programs 42 storing programs 43 working with 42 R RC-SREV1 connecting 22 control surface 16 display 18 optional AC adapter 27 rear panel 20 selecting SREV1s 65 turning on and off 26 Rear panel RC-SREV1 20 SREV1 14 SREV1—Owner’s Manual 98 Index Recalling, quick memories 42 Receive channels, MIDI 69 Remote controller, see RC-SREV1 REMOTE port connecting 22 RC-SREV1 20 SREV1 15 Rev page 56 Reverb balance assigning Control Changes 71 fine editing 56 Main 1, grouped 54 Reverb level assigning Control Changes 71 fine editing 56 Reverb modes about 6 convolution times 6 definition 94 display 18 selecting 34 Reverb time 6 fine editing 56 Main 1, grouped 52 Rev-mute, bypass mode 40 Routing inputs, see Assigning inputs RS-422 definition 94 SERIAL ports 64 S Saving programs in the library 46 projects 49 Selected SREV1 18 Selecting inputs 35 reverb modes 34 SREV1s from the RC-SREV1 65 wordclock source 75 SERIAL ports about 15 Setting bypass mode 40 input & output levels 36 meter mode 39 MIDI receive channels 69 Setup page 34, 65 Shelving, definition 94 SIGNAL indicator 12 Slots assigning inputs 35 card options 82 card specifications 83 choosing cards 83 installing I/O cards 84 output assignments 9 SREV1—Owner’s Manual SmartMedia 29 SP2 file types 9 SP4 file types 9 Specifications I/O cards 83 SREV1 block diagram 10 bypassing 40 features 4 front panel 12 in a nutshell 2 installation v rear panel 14 turning on and off 26 Startup internal operations 33 RC-SREV1 32 SREV1 32 Storing, quick memories 43 Switching on the RC-SREV1 26 Switching on the SREV1 26 Sync, wordclock 75 System examples 23 System parameters 9 T Tabs 18 Tascam TDIF-1 format definition 94 I/O cards 82 Termination, wordclock 74 Thru post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 Title edit dialog box 41 Titling edit dialog box 41 editing library program titles 46 editing project titles 49 editing quick memory program titles 43 TM4 file types 9 TMC file types 9 Troubleshooting 85 Turning on the RC-SREV1 26 Turning on the SREV1 26 Type post EQ 59 pre EQ 57 U Unlock, wordclock 75 Unsync, wordclock 75 Uppercase, titling UTILITY button 16 V Vent 12 W Warnings i WAV file types 9 Web site iv Wheel, PARAMETER 17 WORD CLOCK IN about 15 using 74 Wordclocks about 74 definition 94 hookup examples 78 selecting 75 WORD CLOCK IN 74 Y Yamaha web site iv YGDAI card specifications 83 cards 82 definition 94 YAMAHA [Sampling Reverberator] Date: 1 Oct 2000 MIDI Implementation Chart Model: SREV1 Function... Version: 1.0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Channel Default Changed 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16 Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered X X ************** OMNI OFF/OMNI ON X X Memorized True Voice X ************** X X Note Number Velocity Note On Note Off X X X X After Touch Keys Ch’s X X X X X X X O Assignable X ************** X X Assignable X X Parameter Change Pitch bend Control Change Prog Change 0–95 :True# System Exclusive System Common :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune X X X X X X System Real Time :Clock :Commands X X X X Aux Messages :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset X X X X X X X X Notes Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO O: Yes X: No YAMAHA CORPORATION V652000 R1 1 IP 112 01 08 150 AP Printed in Japan Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
Yamaha SREV1 de handleiding
- Type
- de handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha SREV1 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha SREV1 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha SREV1 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha SREV1 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha SREV1 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha SREV1 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha SREV1 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha SREV1 Brugervejledning
- čeština: Yamaha SREV1 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha SREV1 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha SREV1 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha SREV1 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha SREV1 Manualul proprietarului